You are on page 1of 268

05/08 CODE TECHNICAL REFERENCE

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGIAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

File No. SME06002800 R060821C5100-TTEC Ver00_2006-12

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.

Introduction
The 05/08 Code Technical Reference lists the codes in adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 for the e-STUDIO163/165/203/205. It addresses their purposes, specific descriptions and timing. This document is intended to facilitate your understanding of the code functions and increase customer satisfaction.

Precautions in Servicing For the codes used by the service technician, the cautions mentioned in the Service Handbook must be stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has completed the service training course.

Warning Please handle any confidential information included in this manual with appropriate care. If you fail to do so, you may be punished according to law.

Manual Format: The manual consists as follows.


Introduction Destination How to read 05/08 code Code table by category Explains the expression of destination in this book. This code explains the written item and its content for each 05 and 08 code. Adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 are listed individually on a code table by category. This code table is convenient for searching a desired code. It is possible to jump from this table to the item in the body of this book directly.

1. 05 Adjustment Code Explains each 05 adjustment code. 2. 08 Setting Code Explains each 08 setting code.

05/08 codes are basically explained in the numerical order. However, they are not always in an order because several codes are provided for items that are described by function.

Destination: The destinations described in this Technical Reference are as follows.


Notation EUR Actual destination ASD: Asia AUD: Australia CND: China MJD: Europe SAD/ASU: Saudi Arabia KRD: Korea ARD: Latin America TWD: Taiwan NAD: North America JPD/FJP: Japan Reference As a classification of destinations, when EUR is written, this signifies the entire destination except UC and JPN, unless otherwise written.

UC JPN

How to Read 05/08 Codes: Following items are explained for each code. [05 Adjustment Code]
Item Code Number Code Name Purpose Description Content The number of a 05 adjustment code The name of a code Explains the purpose of the code. Explains the adjustment content. Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories. 1. Codes, which execute only adjustment. 2. Codes, which execute after selecting the adjustment value. These codes contain the default and the adjustment acceptable value. * For detailed adjustment procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)]. Explains the adjustment timing.

Adjustment Timing

Principle
Caution

Explains the adjustment principle for the code that needs a specific explanation.
Explains the caution. Perform the adjustment after reading the caution. Important information including adjustment conditions (which order of codes to perform adjustment) is written in this section.

[08 Setting Code]


Item Code Number Code Name Purpose Description Content The number of a 08 setting code The name of a code Explains the purpose of the code. Explains the setting content. Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories. 1. Codes, which execute only setting. 2. Codes, which execute after selecting the setting value. These codes contain selectable options. * For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.5 Setting mode (08)]. Explains the setting timing. Explains the caution. Perform the setting after reading the caution. Important information including restrictions on settings is written in this section.

Setting Timing Caution

CONTENTS
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

1. Code Table by Category.............................................................................................. 1-1


[05 Adjustment Code] .......................................................................................................... 1-1 [08 Setting Code] ................................................................................................................. 1-2

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05 ..................................................................................... 2-1


List of 05 Adjustment Code.................................................................................................. 2-1 05-200/201 .......................................................................................................................... 2-3 05-205 ................................................................................................................................. 2-4 05-210 ................................................................................................................................. 2-5 05-220 to 222 ...................................................................................................................... 2-6 05-233 to 235 ...................................................................................................................... 2-7 05-247/270 .......................................................................................................................... 2-8 05-248 ................................................................................................................................. 2-9 05-280 ............................................................................................................................... 2-10 05-286 ............................................................................................................................... 2-11 05-305 ............................................................................................................................... 2-12 05-306 ............................................................................................................................... 2-13 05-310 ............................................................................................................................... 2-14 05-311 to 313 .................................................................................................................... 2-15 05-340 ............................................................................................................................... 2-16 05-350/351 ........................................................................................................................ 2-17 05-354/355 ........................................................................................................................ 2-18 05-357 ............................................................................................................................... 2-19 05-358 ............................................................................................................................... 2-20 05-359 ............................................................................................................................... 2-21 05-365/366 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22 05-401/405/1300 ............................................................................................................... 2-23 05-410/411/498 ................................................................................................................. 2-25 05-421/422 ........................................................................................................................ 2-27 05-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 2-29 05-430 to 438 .................................................................................................................... 2-30 05-440 to 445 .................................................................................................................... 2-32 05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 ............................................................................. 2-34 05-464 ............................................................................................................................... 2-37 05-466 ............................................................................................................................... 2-38 05-497 ............................................................................................................................... 2-39 05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 .......................................................................... 2-41 05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 ............................................................................. 2-42 05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 ............................................................................. 2-43 05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 ................................................................................. 2-44 05-532 to 534/835 to 837 .................................................................................................. 2-45 05-535 to 537/820 to 822 .................................................................................................. 2-46 05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 .............................................................. 2-47 05-593 to 595 .................................................................................................................... 2-48 05-596 to 599 .................................................................................................................... 2-49 05-600 to 602/869 to 871 .................................................................................................. 2-50 05-609 ............................................................................................................................... 2-51 05-620 to 623/865 to 867 .................................................................................................. 2-52 05-648/654/655 ................................................................................................................. 2-53 05-664/665 ........................................................................................................................ 2-54 05-667/672/676/678 .......................................................................................................... 2-55

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

3. Code in Setting Mode 08 ............................................................................................. 3-1


List of 08 Setting Code ........................................................................................................ 3-1 08-202 ................................................................................................................................. 3-6 08-203 ................................................................................................................................. 3-7 08-204 ................................................................................................................................. 3-8 08-205 ................................................................................................................................. 3-9 08-206 ............................................................................................................................... 3-10 08-209 ............................................................................................................................... 3-11 08-219 ............................................................................................................................... 3-12 08-224 to 228 .................................................................................................................... 3-13 08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 ............................................................................. 3-14 08-246 ............................................................................................................................... 3-15 08-250 ............................................................................................................................... 3-16 08-251 ............................................................................................................................... 3-17 08-252 ............................................................................................................................... 3-18 08-253 ............................................................................................................................... 3-19 08-254 ............................................................................................................................... 3-21 08-255 ............................................................................................................................... 3-22 08-258 ............................................................................................................................... 3-23 08-260 ............................................................................................................................... 3-24 08-261 ............................................................................................................................... 3-25 08-263 ............................................................................................................................... 3-26 08-265 ............................................................................................................................... 3-27 08-266 ............................................................................................................................... 3-28 08-273 ............................................................................................................................... 3-29 08-274 ............................................................................................................................... 3-30 08-276 ............................................................................................................................... 3-31 08-281 ............................................................................................................................... 3-32 08-283 ............................................................................................................................... 3-33 08-284 ............................................................................................................................... 3-34 08-285 ............................................................................................................................... 3-35 08-286 ............................................................................................................................... 3-36 08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 .................................................................................... 3-37 08-300 ............................................................................................................................... 3-40 08-305 to 308 .................................................................................................................... 3-41 08-312 to 314 .................................................................................................................... 3-43 08-315/316 ........................................................................................................................ 3-45 08-320 to 323 .................................................................................................................... 3-46 08-327 to 329 .................................................................................................................... 3-47 08-330/332 ........................................................................................................................ 3-48 08-335 ............................................................................................................................... 3-49 08-345 ............................................................................................................................... 3-50 08-346 ............................................................................................................................... 3-51 08-347/353 ........................................................................................................................ 3-52 08-348/349 ........................................................................................................................ 3-53 08-352 ............................................................................................................................... 3-54 08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 ............................................................................... 3-55 08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/ 1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 .............................................................. 3-56 08-381 ............................................................................................................................... 3-59 08-388/389 ........................................................................................................................ 3-60 08-400 ............................................................................................................................... 3-61 08-404/405 ........................................................................................................................ 3-62 08-407/411 ........................................................................................................................ 3-63 08-409/448 ........................................................................................................................ 3-64
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 .......................................................................... 3-65 08-414 ............................................................................................................................... 3-66 08-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 3-67 08-433/800/801/802/804/896 ............................................................................................ 3-68 08-439 to 441/523/526 ...................................................................................................... 3-69 08-455 ............................................................................................................................... 3-70 08-462 ............................................................................................................................... 3-71 08-463 ............................................................................................................................... 3-73 08-476/536/537/539 .......................................................................................................... 3-74 08-480 ............................................................................................................................... 3-76 08-481 ............................................................................................................................... 3-77 08-482 ............................................................................................................................... 3-78 08-483 ............................................................................................................................... 3-79 08-486 ............................................................................................................................... 3-80 08-502 ............................................................................................................................... 3-81 08-510 ............................................................................................................................... 3-82 08-515/516 ........................................................................................................................ 3-83 08-525/527/540/541 .......................................................................................................... 3-84 08-535 ............................................................................................................................... 3-86 08-538 ............................................................................................................................... 3-87 08-550 ............................................................................................................................... 3-88 08-603 ............................................................................................................................... 3-89 08-604 ............................................................................................................................... 3-90 08-611 ............................................................................................................................... 3-91 08-615 ............................................................................................................................... 3-92 08-617 ............................................................................................................................... 3-93 08-618 ............................................................................................................................... 3-94 08-631 ............................................................................................................................... 3-95 08-638 ............................................................................................................................... 3-96 08-641 ............................................................................................................................... 3-97 08-642 ............................................................................................................................... 3-98 08-649 ............................................................................................................................... 3-99 08-650 ............................................................................................................................. 3-101 08-655 ............................................................................................................................. 3-102 08-660/661 ...................................................................................................................... 3-103 08-666 ............................................................................................................................. 3-104 08-669 ............................................................................................................................. 3-105 08-672 ............................................................................................................................. 3-106 08-684/686 ...................................................................................................................... 3-107 08-685 ............................................................................................................................. 3-108 08-690 ............................................................................................................................. 3-109 08-691 ............................................................................................................................. 3-110 08-693 ............................................................................................................................. 3-111 08-695 ............................................................................................................................. 3-112 08-698 ............................................................................................................................. 3-113 08-699 ............................................................................................................................. 3-114 08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 ............... 3-115 08-712/713/714 ............................................................................................................... 3-118 08-767 to 771/775 to 778 ................................................................................................ 3-119 08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 .................................................................... 3-120 08-830/868/869 ............................................................................................................... 3-122 08-831/870/871 ............................................................................................................... 3-123 08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 ......................................................................................... 3-124 08-838 ............................................................................................................................. 3-126 08-839 ............................................................................................................................. 3-127
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 ...................................................................................... 3-128 08-886 ............................................................................................................................. 3-129 08-900/906 ...................................................................................................................... 3-130 08-905 ............................................................................................................................. 3-131 08-921/1951 .................................................................................................................... 3-132 08-922/923 ...................................................................................................................... 3-133 08-945 ............................................................................................................................. 3-134 08-947 ............................................................................................................................. 3-135 08-949 ............................................................................................................................. 3-136 08-970 ............................................................................................................................. 3-137 08-971 ............................................................................................................................. 3-138 08-973 ............................................................................................................................. 3-139 08-995 ............................................................................................................................. 3-140 08-1002 ........................................................................................................................... 3-141 08-1003 ........................................................................................................................... 3-142 08-1006 to 1010/1112 ..................................................................................................... 3-143 08-1011/1012 .................................................................................................................. 3-144 08-1013 ........................................................................................................................... 3-145 08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 ............................................................................................ 3-146 08-1017 to 1019 .............................................................................................................. 3-147 08-1020 ........................................................................................................................... 3-148 08-1024/1025 .................................................................................................................. 3-149 08-1026 to 1029 .............................................................................................................. 3-150 08-1030 to 1032 .............................................................................................................. 3-151 08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 ............................................................................... 3-152 08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 ............................................................................................ 3-154 08-1055 ........................................................................................................................... 3-155 08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 .............................................................................. 3-156 08-1073/1074 .................................................................................................................. 3-158 08-1075 to 1077 .............................................................................................................. 3-159 08-1078 to 1088 .............................................................................................................. 3-160 08-1093 to 1096 .............................................................................................................. 3-162 08-1114 ........................................................................................................................... 3-163 08-1123 ........................................................................................................................... 3-164 08-1124 ........................................................................................................................... 3-165 08-1141 ........................................................................................................................... 3-166 08-1144 ........................................................................................................................... 3-167 08-1149 ........................................................................................................................... 3-168 08-1372 ........................................................................................................................... 3-169 08-1378 ........................................................................................................................... 3-170 08-1380 ........................................................................................................................... 3-171 08-1382 ........................................................................................................................... 3-172 08-1385/1386/1388 ......................................................................................................... 3-173 08-1410 ........................................................................................................................... 3-174 08-1428 ........................................................................................................................... 3-175 08-1440 ........................................................................................................................... 3-176 08-1447 ........................................................................................................................... 3-177 08-1448 ........................................................................................................................... 3-178 08-1449 ........................................................................................................................... 3-179 08-1450 ........................................................................................................................... 3-180 08-1451 ........................................................................................................................... 3-181 08-1628 ........................................................................................................................... 3-182 08-1882 ........................................................................................................................... 3-183 08-1913 ........................................................................................................................... 3-184 08-1952 to 1955 .............................................................................................................. 3-185
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

08-1960 to 1979 .............................................................................................................. 3-186 08-1989 ........................................................................................................................... 3-187 08-1990 ........................................................................................................................... 3-188 08-1991 ........................................................................................................................... 3-189 08-1993 ........................................................................................................................... 3-190 08-1994 ........................................................................................................................... 3-191 08-1996 ........................................................................................................................... 3-192

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1.

Code Table by Category 1

2.

Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2

3.

Code in Setting Mode 08 3

1. Code Table by Category


05 adjustment code and 08 setting code are provided by the category in the table. There are category names only for 05 adjustment code and 08 setting code and common for both codes.

[05 Adjustment Code]


Category ADF/RADF Sub category Aligning amount Transporting 05 Adjustment Code 05-354/355 05-357 05-358 05-365/366 05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 05-667/672/676/678 05-609 05-596 to 599 05-593 to 595 05-600 to 602/869 to 871 05-620 to 623/865 to 867 05-648/654/655 05-664/665 05-430 to 438 05-532 to 534/835 to 837 05-535 to 537/820 to 822 05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 05-466 05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 05-424/425 05-421/422 05-200/201 05-247/270 05-205 05-248 05-311 to 313 05-305 05-306 05-359 05-350/351 05-340 05-310 05-210 05-220 to 222 05-233 to 235 05-280 05-410/411/498 05-440 to 445 Refer to page 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-22 2-41 2-42 2-43 2-44 2-55 2-51 2-49 2-48 2-50 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-30 2-45 2-46 2-47 2-38 2-34 2-29 2-27 2-3 2-8 2-4 2-9 2-15 2-12 2-13 2-21 2-17 2-16 2-14 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-10 2-25 2-32

Image

Image density

Printer density Gamma table Gamma balance Gamma slope Background adjustment Sharpness Smudged/Faint text Toner saving Margin Range correction

Paper feeding

Drive Development

Scanner

Paper pushing amount Aligning amount Exit motor Main motor Auto-toner Developer bias Temperature Drum temperature LED Position Carriage position Shading position Reproduction ratio Peak Main charger bias Transfer bias Separation bias Toner recycle Write starting

Charger Transfer Separation Process Laser

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-1

[08 Setting Code]


Category RADF Counter Sub category Duplex copying Scan count Double count 08 Setting Code 08-685 08-312 to 314 08-327 to 329 08-345 08-347/353 08-348/349 08-352 08-388/389 08-335 08-1410 08-315/316 08-330/332 08-305 to 308 08-320 to 323 08-381 08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 08-1385/1386/1388 08-1372 08-1378 08-1380 08-1382 08-463 08-273 08-1144 08-1428 08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 08-1026 to 1029 08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 08-1020 08-1017 to 1019 08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 08-265 08-1989 08-1990 08-1991 08-1993 08-1994 08-1996 08-1055 08-1030 to 1032 08-1440 08-1960 to 1979 08-1006 to 1010/1112 08-1011/1012 08-1075 to 1077 08-1141 08-1013 Refer to page 3-108 3-43 3-47 3-50 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-60 3-49 3-174 3-45 3-48 3-41 3-46 3-59 3-55 3-173 3-169 3-170 3-171 3-172 3-73 3-29 3-167 3-175 3-146 3-150 3-156 3-148 3-147 3-154 3-27 3-187 3-188 3-189 3-190 3-191 3-192 3-155 3-151 3-176 3-186 3-143 3-144 3-159 3-166 3-145

Total counter copy Total number of pages Toner cartridge Transmitted/ Received pages in FAX Number of output pages External counter Paper source Media type Fuser unit

Scanner

Data clear Network

Control status Transmitting E-mail Memory full SRAM AppleTalk NetWare SNMP DDNS DNS POP3 E-mail Enable server's

FTP HTTP IP Conflict IP Filter TCP/IP IPX/SPX LPD MAC address NCP

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2

Category Network

Sub category NIC NetWare printing NT domain PCL SMTP Raw TCP Raw Port Raw printing Web data WINS Internet FAX

Version

Fax Image processing

Maintenance

Workgroup name Automatic transfer FROM System/PFC Controller ROM / Scan ROM Function table data / language data Automatic transfer LED flashing Auto-toner Toner recycle Drum life correction Temperature/ Humidity FSMS RDMS PM

08 Setting Code 08-1002 08-1003 08-1093 to 1096 08-1123 08-973 08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 08-1073/1074 08-945 08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 08-260 08-1024/1025 08-266 08-274 08-1114 08-1124 08-660/661 08-921/1951 08-900/906 08-1952 to 1955 08-922/923 08-510 08-1913 08-455 08-838 08-1628 08-839 08-258 08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 08-251 08-252 08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/ 1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/ 1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 08-253 08-250 08-767 to 771/775 to 778 08-995 08-483 08-486 08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 08-502 08-538 08-550

Refer to page 3-141 3-142 3-162 3-164 3-139 3-152 3-158 3-134 3-37 3-24 3-149 3-28 3-30 3-163 3-165 3-103 3-132 3-130 3-185 3-133 3-82 3-184 3-70 3-126 3-182 3-127 3-23 3-115 3-17 3-18 3-56

Laser

Error history Telephone number Service notification Equipment number Polygonal motor Laser power Error diffusion / dither Default setting

Image

3-19 3-16 3-119 3-140 3-79 3-80 3-128 3-81 3-87 3-88

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-3

Category Paper feeding

Sub category Change of paper source Retry Paper feeding Default setting Paper exit Paper size Paper dimension Auto-toner[ Developer bias X in 1 Custom mode Copy volume Job clear Energy saving mode Sorting Timer

08 Setting Code 08-481 08-482 08-254 08-255 08-480 08-698 08-699 08-224 to 228 08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 08-414 08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 08-650 08-631 08-300 08-246 08-970 08-641 08-649 08-204 08-205 08-206 08-691 08-209 08-219 08-611 08-202 08-263 08-276 08-281 08-283 08-284 08-285 08-286 08-603 08-604 08-618 08-642 08-617 08-261

Refer to page 3-77 3-78 3-21 3-22 3-76 3-113 3-114 3-13 3-14 3-66 3-124 3-101 3-95 3-40 3-15 3-137 3-97 3-99 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-110 3-11 3-12 3-91 3-6 3-26 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-89 3-90 3-94 3-98 3-93 3-25

Development User interface

Template File Book type External counter Administrator Default setting

Department management Paper size

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4

Category General

Sub category Enhanced bold All clear Reset Database Toner cartridge check Nearly empty Partition Page setting Memory Equipment adjustment mode Initialization

08 Setting Code 08-1149 08-669 08-655 08-684/686 08-695 08-971 08-666 08-949 08-615 08-203 08-690 08-693 08-947 08-1882 08-638 08-712/713/714 08-672 08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 08-439 to 441/523/526 08-404/405 08-407/411 08-409/448 08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 08-424/425 08-433/800/801/802/804/896 08-476/536/537/539 08-515/516 08-525/527/540/541 08-535 08-400 08-830/868/869 08-831/870/871

Refer to page 3-168 3-105 3-102 3-107 3-112 3-138 3-104 3-136 3-92 3-7 3-109 3-111 3-135 3-183 3-96 3-118 3-106 3-120 3-69 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-67 3-68 3-74 3-83 3-84 3-86 3-61 3-122 3-123

Main charger bias Fuser

Time differences Restriction to 250 sheets exiting Department management Main charger bias Pre-running Temperature

Transfer bias SEparation bias

Status counter Transfer bias Separation bias

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-5

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05


List of 05 Adjustment Code
Code 05-200/201 05-205 05-210 05-220 to 222 05-233 to 235 05-247/270 05-248 05-280 05-286 05-305 05-306 05-310 05-311 to 313 05-340 05-350/351 05-354/355 05-357 05-358 05-359 05-365/366 Content Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor Developer Bias Output Adjustment Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment Transfer DC Output Adjustment Separation DC Output Adjustment Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/ Humidity Display Drum Thermistor Temperature Display Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle Laser Power Adjustment Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Direction Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction Forced Performing of Peak Detection R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Shading Position Adjustment ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning from ADF/RADF Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is Used) Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed) Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed) Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed Margin Adjustment Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position Aligning Amount Adjustment Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope) Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function) Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function) Page 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22

05-401/405/1300

2-23

05-410/411/498 05-421/422

2-25 2-27

05-424/425 05-430 to 438 05-440 to 445 05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 05-464 05-466 05-497 05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847

2-29 2-30 2-32 2-34 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-41

05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852

2-42

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-1

Code 05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857

05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 05-532 to 534/835 to 837 05-535 to 537/820 to 822 05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 05-593 to 595 05-596 to 599 05-600 to 602/869 to 871 05-609 05-620 to 623/865 to 867 05-648/654/655 05-664/665 05-667/672/676/678

Content Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function) Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function) Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/ Scanner Function) Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function) Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function) Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function) Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/ Scanner Function) Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer Function) Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function) Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)

Page 2-43

2-44 2-45 2-46 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-50 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-55

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2

05-200/201
Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
Purpose
When code 05-200 is performed, it automatically corrects the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor. This allows the toner density in the developer material to be measured accurately. Code 05-201 is used to adjust the automatic adjustment value acquired from code 05-200. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-200 05-201 Applied to Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor Automatic adjustment output value correction of auto-toner sensor

Description
When code 05-200 is performed, the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor is automatically adjusted. This automatically adjusts the output voltage of the sensor so that the toner density in the developer material can be detected appropriately. The adjustment requires approximately two minutes. When the value displayed on the control panel is not within the range of 232 to 248 (the auto-toner sensor output is 2.32 to 2.48) after code 05-200 is performed, a value must be entered within the specified value, by using the [ZOOM] ([25%] or [200%]) button for the e-STUDIO163, or the [Up] or [Down] button for the e-STUDIO165/205 on the control panel. For further information, refer to 3.1 [Adjustment of Auto-toner Sensor] in the Service Handbook. By adjusting code 05-201, the automatic adjustment value of the auto-toner sensor acquired from performing code 05-200 can be corrected. As the set value is increased, the toner density in the developer material and the printing density become higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the toner density in the developer material and the printing density become lower. 05-201: * Default: 141 * Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum sensor output, 255: Maximum sensor output)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes when replacing the developer material.

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the developer unit filled with only the developer material (with no toner cartridge loaded, as well as no toner left in the cleaner unit). The equipment adopts the toner recycle system. Therefore, when recycled toner left in the cleaner unit is transferred, proper adjustment cannot be performed.) Adjustment of the toner density in the toner developer material should usually be performed by "Toner density correction (08-414)" instead of code 05-201.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-3

05-205
Developer Bias Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the condition of toner amount adhered onto the photoconductive drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the developer bias output with this code. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the developer bias output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time. Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210) Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222) Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (magnetic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs. For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook. * * Default: 05-220: 165, 05-221: 179, 05-222: 126 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer If an avatar phenomenon occurs If poor transfer occurs

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed. The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust these codes. Decrease the transfer DC output value, if the avatar phenomenon occurs at the halftone area. Note that when the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer may occur. Increase the transfer DC output value, if poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire being soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much. Therefore, use thick paper mode to use thick paper. By using the following codes, the transfer DC output values set by codes 05-220 to 222 are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition. - Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493) - Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4

05-210
Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias output from the high voltage transformer.

Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower. Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs. For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook. * * Default: 78 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code when replacing the high-voltage transformer.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed. The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust this code. By using "Main charger bias correction (08-805 to 809/826/864 to 867), the main charger grid bias output value set by code 05-210 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-5

05-220 to 222
Transfer DC Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the toner transfer condition from the drum to paper changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the transfer DC output with these codes. The adjustment is applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the transfer DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time. Developer bias output adjustment (05-205) Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210) Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235) The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-220 05-221 05-222 Applied to Transfer DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of paper Transfer DC output adjustment (C), center of paper Transfer DC output adjustment (L), range at approx. 5 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower. For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook. * * Default: 05-220: 128, 05-221: 141, 05-222: 108 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer. When an avatar is seen. When poor transfer occurs.

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed. A digital tester and a high-voltage transformer adjustment jig are required. Decrease the transfer DC output value when an avatar is seen at the halftone area. Note that when the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer could occur. Increase the transfer DC output value when poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire being soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much. Therefore, when using thick paper, thick paper mode should be used. By using the following setting codes, the transfer DC output values set by these codes are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition. - Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493) - Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6

05-233 to 235
Separation DC Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the DC voltage value to separate paper from the drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the separation DC output by using these codes. The adjustment is applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the separation DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time. Developer bias output adjustment (05-205) Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210) Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222) The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-233 05-234 05-235 Applied to Separation DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of paper Separation DC output adjustment (C), center of paper Separation DC output adjustment (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading edge of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage is increased and positive charges on the paper are decreased; therefore, the separation is easier to be performed. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the DC voltage is decreased and the ratio of the positive charges on the paper decreasing is reduced; therefore, the separation is more difficult to be performed. For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook. * * Default: 05-233: 55, 05-234: 55, 05-235: 36 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Separation is more difficult, 255: separation is easier)

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the high-voltage transformer If poor paper separation occurs If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs

Caution
Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed. The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust these codes. Increase the separation DC output, if poor paper separation occurs regardless of the charger wire being soiled or if thin paper is used frequently. Note that poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs when the separation DC output is increased too much. If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs, decrease the separation DC output value. Note that when the separation output value is decreased too much, paper separation ability decreases. By using the following codes, the separation DC output values set by codes 05-233 to 235 are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition. - Separation DC output correction (08-831/870/871)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-7

05-247/270
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/Humidity Display
Purpose
These codes are used to display the temperature and humidity of the environment where the equipment is installed. The temperature and humidity are detected through the temperature/humidity sensor installed on the left of the equipment. The displayed data is updated at the specific timing. These codes are used only to display the temperature or humidity, and no values can be set. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-247 05-270 Applied to Temperature/humidity sensor humidity display Temperature/humidity sensor temperature display

Description
When these codes are performed, the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/ humidity sensor are displayed. When the print operation is completed, the temperature and humidity data is retrieved and each display is updated. * * Default: 05-247: 50 (%), 05-270: 23 (C) Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/humidity sensor.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8

05-248
Drum Thermistor Temperature Display
Purpose
This code is used to display the temperature of the drum surface. The temperature of the drum is detected through the drum thermistor installed in the developer unit. The displayed data is updated at the specific timing. This code is used only to display the temperature, and no values can be set.

Description
When this code is performed, the temperature of the drum detected through the drum thermistor is displayed. When the print operation is completed, the temperature data is retrieved and the drum temperature display is updated. * * Default: 23 (C) Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to check the temperature of the drum.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-9

05-280
Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle
Purpose
This code is used to idle the recovery toner supply mechanism and forcibly remove toner from the cleaner unit when replacing the developer material.

Description
When this code is performed, the recovery toner supply mechanism is idled and toner is forcibly removed from the cleaner unit.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, and then replace the developer material.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10

05-286
Laser Power Adjustment
Purpose
Latent image is produced when the laser beam is irradiated onto the drum. This code is used to adjust the printing density by adjusting the output of the laser beam.

Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower. * * Default: 60 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the printing density by changing the laser power.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. By using "Laser power correction (08-872/873/875 to 877/883), the laser output value set by code 05-286 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 11

05-305
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Direction
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner secondary scanning direction, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper. * * Default: 105 Acceptable values: 51 to 206 (51: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 206: Maximum to the trailing edge of paper)
When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a copy image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12

05-306
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner primary scanning direction, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the front of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the rear of paper. * * Default: 127 Acceptable values: 121 to 136 (121: Maximum to the rear of paper, 136: Maximum to the front of paper)
Scanner primary scanning direction

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 13

05-310
Forced Performing of Peak Detection
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to absorb the variation in the amount of light emitted from the exposure light sources for each LED (R-LED, B-LED and YG-LED) installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit, due to individual differences and secular changes, to optimize the amount of light emitted through the life cycle of the equipment, and to ensure the color sensitivity when scanning an original.

Description
When this code is performed, each LED individually lights up and the amount of light emitted is automatically adjusted, and the adjusted current emission value is retained. Then, each LED lights up according to the retained current value. Notes: Perform this code according to the following steps: 1. Close the original cover, ADF or RADF. 2. Enter this code in 05 ADJUSTMENT code. Then Press the [START] or [COPY] button. 3. Automatic adjustment is performed as described below: - The CIS unit moves. - After the equipment is suspended for a few seconds, the green light is emitted from the light source for some ten seconds, and goes out for a moment. - The red light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment. - The blue light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment. - The yellow light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment. - The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds, and then goes out for a moment. - The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for some ten seconds, and then goes out. 4. Press the [CANCEL] button to finish the adjustment. * An error (C26) may occasionally occur during the adjustment. If the error occurs, refer to Caution to handle the error.

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the CIS unit, MAIN board and SRAM board

Caution
If the error (C26) occurs when this code is performed, handle the error according to the following steps: 1) Set the default values for codes 05-311, 312 and 313. 2) Perform this code. * In case the error occurs at this point, proceed with the next step. 3) Turn the main switch OFF and ON to normally start up the equipment. * In case the error (C26) still occurs even after the above operations, replace the CIS unit and perform this code again.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14

05-311 to 313
R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the current actual value for the exposure light source installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-311 05-312 05-313 Applied to R-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source) B-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source) YG-LED Current actual value adjustment (LED alley: sub light source)

Description
When this code is performed, the current actual value (current set initial value + light amount correction value) for each LED is changed. The default value is set at the same as the current set initial value for each LED (without correction). * * Default: 05-311: 76, 05-312: 62, 05-313: 160 Acceptable values: 0 to 255

Adjustment Timing
None.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 15

05-340
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan speed in the scanner secondary scanning direction to scan an original in the actual ratio.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased. * * Default: 134 Acceptable values: 76 to 181 (76: Minimum reproduction ratio, 181: Maximum reproduction ratio, Adjustment amount: 0.0947%/step)

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - CIS unit

Caution
This adjustment requires a scale. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16

05-350/351
Shading Position Adjustment
Purpose
When streaky images are output due to scratches or dirt on the shading correction plate, these codes are used to adjust the shading correction position in order to enable shading correction while keeping off the scratches or dirt. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-350 05-351 Applied to Shading position adjustment when using the original glass Shading position adjustment when using the ADF/RADF

Description
As the set value is increased, the shading correction position moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the shading correction position moves to the right of the equipment. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 118 to 138 (Adjustment amount: 0.064 mm/step)

In the case of scratches or dirt on a part of the shading correction plate, use these codes to adjust the shading correction position while keeping off the scratches or dirt, and prevent images from being streaky.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if images with streaks in the secondary scanning direction are produced.

Caution
If streaky images persist after this adjustment is performed, clean the shading correction plate. If streaky images still persist, replace the shading correction plate. If streaky images still persist, check other areas, such as the drum, for flaws or dirt.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 17

05-354/355
ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment
* Code 05-355 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
A skew of the original is eliminated by making its leading edge contact the aligning roller and slightly slacking it, when the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is used to fed. These codes are used to adjust the paper aligning amount for the accurate alignment of the leading edge of paper. Individual codes are available because different rollers are used when scanning simplex and duplex originals. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-354 05-355 Applied to Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF) Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased. * * Default: 10 Acceptable values: 0 to 20 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 20: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
When feeding a simplex (face) original: If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF feed roller and if this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the image failure. When feeding a duplex (reverse side) original: If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF reverse roller and if this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the reverse roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18

05-357
Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction. This can be done by changing the ADF/RADF read motor rotating speed because it can change the speed of the original passing the ADF original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased. * * Default: 50 Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 100: Maximum reproduction ratio)

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
After the following part are replaced, if there is a problem with a copied image done by ADF/RADF and if the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning is required, perform this adjustment. - Read motor (parts for the ADF/RADF)

Caution
This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original. The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly adjusted prior to this adjustment. If deviated from its correct position, the scanning position when using the ADF/RADF cannot be correctly adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 19

05-358
ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scanning position in the scanner primary scanning direction when the ADF/RADF is used, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the rear of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the front of paper. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the front of paper, 255: Maximum to the rear of paper)

Scanner primary scanning direction

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
If there is a problem in the printing image of the ADF/RADF and range adjustment of scanner primary scanning direction is required, perform this adjustment.

Caution
This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original. The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct position, the scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20

05-359
CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning from ADF/RADF
Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, the amount of light reflected from the exposure light source becomes to the maximum and the CIS unit position is determined where the best image can be obtained.

Description
As the set value is increased, the CIS unit moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the CIS unit moves to the right of the equipment. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the right of the equipment, 255: Maximum to the left of the equipment)

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if a scan image when the ADF/RADF is used results in poor quality, compared to a scan image using the original glass.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 21

05-365/366
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is Used)
Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, it is transported to the scanning position on the original glass and then stopped. These codes are used to adjust the original stop position on the original glass, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-365 05-366 Applied to Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF) Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the original is transported to the position closer to the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the original is transported to the position far away from the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper. * * Default: 50 Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 100: Maximum to the trailing edge of paper)
When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction (when the RADF is used)

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
For instance, after the ADF/RADF is installed and the test copy is made, if the scan start position is deviated from the appropriate position, perform this adjustment.

Caution
The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct position, scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22

05-401/405/1300
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed)
* * Code 05-1300 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Code 05-1300 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror. This changes in pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum primary scanning direction and finally adjusts the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-401 05-405 05-1300 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the printer operation Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the copy operation Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing without rotating an image) Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing with rotating an image)

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction is increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased. * * Default: 05-401: 134, 05-405: 131, 05-1300-0/1: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-401] Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st line and the 21st line from the left edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm. Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (A)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Primary scanning direction

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 23

[05-405]
Paper movement direction

Shaded areas indicate the image on the paper.

[05-1300] Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected primary scanning ratio, code 05-1300 can be used to finely correct the primary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for code 05-401.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution
The adjustment for code 05-405 requires a scale. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/ 205. Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-1300 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required. If the adjustment using code 05-1300 is still necessary, perform the image dimensional adjustment prior to this adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

Primary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24

05-410/411/498
Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position
* Code 05-498 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning direction, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-410 05-411 05-498 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Printing position of primary scanning direction in the copy operation Printing position of primary scanning direction in the printer operation Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing, Long size paper Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing, Short size paper (A4/LT or smaller)

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position of the image is shifted toward the end point (in a direction where the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the printing position is shifted toward the start point (in a direction where the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction. * * Default: 05-410/411: 88, 05-498-0/1: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

[05-410] The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted when code 05-411 is adjusted. [05-411] Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm. Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Primary scanning direction

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 25

[05-498] Key in 3, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to duplex print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/ 205. The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted when code 05-411 is adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

Primary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26

05-421/422
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed)
* * Code 05-422 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Code 05-422 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
Changing the rotation speed of the drum changes the pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum secondary scanning direction and adjusts the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction. * By fine adjusting the main motor speed with these codes, rotation speed of transport rollers changes at the same time and appropriate "secondary scanning reproduction ratio" adjustment is performed. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-421 05-422 Applied to Printing reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the copy and printer operations Image reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the fax operation

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction is increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased. * * Default: 05-421/422: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-421] Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st line and the 21st line from the leading edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm. Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (C)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

Secondary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 27

[05-422] Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected secondary scanning ratio, code 05-422 can be used to finely correct the secondary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for code 05-421.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment: - Main motor - Drum

Caution
Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-422 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28

05-424/425
Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed
* * * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. The exit motor is installed only when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit) is installed. Code 05-425 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the exit motor rotation speed is too fast, paper sent from the fuser unit is tight. By adjusting the rotation speed of the exit motor, the paper becoming tight can be prevented. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-424 05-425 Applied to Exit motor speed in the copy and printer operations Exit motor speed in the fax operation

Description
As the set value is increased, the rotation speed becomes faster. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the rotation speed becomes slower. * * * Default: 05-424: 128, 05-425: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum rotation speed, 255: Maximum rotation speed) Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation speed. When code 05-425 is used, the basic adjusted value can be finely adjusted even more. However, basically, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if paper sent from the fuser unit is tight, perform this adjustment: - Exit roller

Caution
Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation speed, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required. Basically, adjustment is unnecessary because an ideal value is specified for the difference in speed between the main motor as the driving source of the fuser roller, and the exit motor as the driving source of the exit roller. Use these codes in a particular case, for example, paper transported between the fuser roller and exit roller is tight due to its characteristics.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 29

05-430 to 438
Margin Adjustment
* Code 05-434 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
Perform top/left/right/bottom margin in copy and printer modes. Perform bottom margin adjustment at duplex printing. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-430 05-431 05-432 05-433 05-434 Sub code 0 Applied to Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank area at the trailing of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Function mode Copy

Printer

05-435 05-436 05-437 05-438

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30

Description
By adjusting the image cutting range, adjustment of an apparent blank area is performed. As the set value is increased, the margin (the area of the image being cut) increases. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the margin becomes decreased. * * Default: 05-430: 9, 05-431: 0, 05-432: 110, 05-433: 153, 05-434: 29, 05-435: 24, 05-436 to 438: 0 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum margin, 255: Maximum margin)
Paper movement direction Top margin Right Right margin Primary scanning direction Bottom margin

Bottom Left margin Left


e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

Adjustment Timing
When the margin is not in a specified value.

Caution
Open the original cover, ADF or RADF to perform this adjustment. The left margin adjustment using codes 05-431/436 is unnecessary because the left margin is fixed when "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is performed. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/ 205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Top

2 - 31

05-440 to 445
Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position
* Codes 05-443 to 445 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the paper transport start timing of the laser writing, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer secondary scanning direction. The benchmark for this adjustment is the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440). When code 05-440 is performed, the adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Codes other than code 05-440 are provided in order to finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when each unit is used to feed. These codes must be performed after the secondary scanning printing position is adjusted when the drawer is used to feed. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-440 05-441 05-442 05-443 05-444 05-445 Applied to Secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed Secondary scanning printing position when the PFU (Paper Feed Unit) is used to feed Secondary scanning printing position when the bypass tray is used to feed Reserved Secondary scanning printing position when the PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal) is used to feed Secondary scanning printing position when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit) is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the image printing position is shifted toward the end point (trailing edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image printing position is shifted toward the start point (leading edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction. * * Default: 05-440: 14, 05-441: 21 Acceptable values: 0 to 40 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 40: Maximum to the trailing edge of paper) Default: 05-442 to 445: 8 Acceptable values: 0 to 15 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 15: Maximum to the trailing edge of paper)

* *

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32

Key in 1 ([05-445] key in 3), press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from each paper source. (A3/LD-sized paper is only for the drawer and ADU. A4/LT-sized paper is for other units.) Next, measure the distance from the leading edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm. Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (D)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

Secondary scanning direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following part is replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment. - Laser optical unit

Caution
First, adjust the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440). When code 05-440 is performed, this adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Then finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when other than the drawer is used to feed. Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/ 205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 33

05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474


Aligning Amount Adjustment
* Codes 05-448, 449, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of a paper skew by making the paper contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly slacking the paper. This code is used to change the paper aligning amount. The aligning amount is adjusted on an envelope according to "Aligning amount adjustment (envelope) (05-464)." The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications: [Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal) Upper/Lower Drawer]
Code 05-448 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

05-449

Note: Only two types of codes are described here. For other codes and default, refer to the next pages. The upcoming explanations for the following parts regarding "Adjustment timing", "Caution" are common; therefore, they are abbreviated. The paper sizes described here are as follows:
Paper size Long size Middle size Short size 330 mm or longer 220 mm to 329 mm 219 mm or shorter Size

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased. * * Default: 14 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
If paper cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller and if this causes a defective image, such as a skew, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image. If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34

Caution
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed. 05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434 * Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

2
[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Drawer]
Code 05-450 Sub code 0 1 2 Applied to Drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size Drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size Drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

* *

Default: 22 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFU (Paper Feed Unit)]


Code 05-451 Sub code 0 1 2 Applied to PFU, when plain paper is fed, long size PFU, when plain paper is fed, middle size PFU, when plain paper is fed, short size

* *

Default: 14 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit)]


Code 05-455 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to ADU, when plain paper is fed, long size ADU, when plain paper is fed, middle size ADU, when plain paper is fed, short size ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size

05-474

* *

Default: 05-455-0 to 2: 38, 05-474-0/1: 24, 05-474-2: 33 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 35

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Bypass Tray]


Code 05-458 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 Applied to Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, long size Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, middle size Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, short size Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, long size Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, middle size Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, short size Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, long size Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, middle size Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, short size Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, post card Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, long size Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, middle size Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, short size

05-460

05-461

05-462

05-463

* *

Default: 10 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36

05-464
Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope)
Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of skew of an envelope when the envelope is fed from the bypass tray. The envelope is aligned by making its leading edge contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly slacking it. This code is used to adjust the envelope aligning amount for the accurate alignment. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-464 Sub code 0 1 2 Applied to Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 330 mm or longer Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 220 mm to 329 mm Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 219 mm or shorter

An envelope should be placed lengthwise (R direction).

Description
As the set value is increased, the envelope aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the envelope aligning amount becomes decreased. * * Default: 10 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
If an envelope cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller of the bypass tray and if this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the envelope aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image. If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 37

05-466
Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind
Purpose
When paper is fed from the bypass tray, it is transported with the registration (aligning) roller. At the same time, the feed roller is also driven to support the paper transport to the registration (aligning) roller (by pushing the paper from behind). This code is used to adjust the time of pushing the paper from behind, to ensure that paper is securely fed. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-466 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Applied to Bypass tray, when plain paper mode is used to feed Bypass tray, when post card mode is used to feed Reserved Bypass tray, when envelope mode is used to feed Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes longer and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes shorter and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes decreased. * * Default: 0 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0 to 128: No pushing, 255: Maximum amount of pushing)

Adjustment Timing
Particularly when thick paper is fed from the bypass tray, if it is not fully pulled to the registration roller and the following error occurs, perform this adjustment to further push the paper from behind. Error code: E010 (Leading edge of paper stops at the registration roller)

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38

05-497
Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning direction, to fit the side deviation in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-497 Sub code 0 1 2 3 5 Applied to Drawer side deviation PFU drawer side deviation PFP upper drawer side deviation PFP lower drawer side deviation Bypass tray side deviation

Sub codes 2 and 3 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position is shifted toward the end point (the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point (the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm. Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position Paper movement direction When the set value is increased

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced and when an adjustment is necessary because there is a side deviation. - Drawer - PFU drawer - PFP upper drawer - PFP lower drawer - Bypass tray

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Primary scanning direction

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 39

Caution
Basically, do not perform deviation adjustments for the drawer (05-497-0) and PFU drawer (05-4971). When adjustments of the drawer and PFU drawer are necessary, perform the adjustments using "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)." Perform the "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" prior to this adjustment. The primary scanning laser writing start position adjusted in "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is the benchmark and the drawer side deviation (05-497) is the adjustment used to correct this benchmark.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40

05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847
Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
* * Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the manual density mode is used. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-501 05-503 05-504 05-700 Applied to Photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Text mode (As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.) Text/photo mode Photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Fax

05-710 05-714 05-845 05-846 05-847

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower. However, in Text mode with Fax Function (05-700), as the set value is increased, the image density becomes lower, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes higher. * * Default: 05-501/503/504: 128, 05-700: 120, 05-710/714/845 to 847: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the center density set value in manual density mode during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 41

05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852


Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
* * Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the density slider is set to the "lighter" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-505 05-506 05-507 05-701 Applied to Text/Photo mode Photo mode Text mode Text mode (As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.) Photo mode Text/photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Fax

05-715 05-719 05-850 05-851 05-852

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes stronger (much lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes weaker (less lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side. * * Default: 33 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Darkest, 255: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to "lighter" side, during the copy/ fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is too large, the adjustment for -1 or more may not be performed when the manual density level is set to "lighter" side. If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42

05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857


Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
* * Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the density slider is set to the "darker" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-508 05-509 05-510 05-702 Applied to Text/Photo mode Photo mode Text mode Text mode (As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.) Photo mode Text/photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Fax

05-720 05-724 05-855 05-856 05-857

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to "darker" side in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower. * * Default: 33 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to "darker" side, during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is too large, the adjustment for +1 or more may not be performed when the manual density level is set to "darker" side. If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 43

05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862
Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/ Scanner Function)
* Codes 05-725 and 729 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the automatic density mode is used. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-512 05-514 05-515 05-725 05-729 05-860 05-861 05-862 Applied to Photo mode Text/Photo mode Text mode Photo mode Text/photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Fax Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher in automatic density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the image density in automatic density mode during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44

05-532 to 534/835 to 837


Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the background peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation. By adjusting the background peak, an image becomes much whiter because pixels judged as "white" are increased. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-532 05-533 05-534 05-835 05-836 05-837 Applied to Text/Photo mode Photo mode Text mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy[

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image background is not printed out. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image background is not deleted but remains. * * Default: 05-532: 32, 05-533: 22, 05-534: 46, 05-835: 32, 05-836: 46, 05-837: 16 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image white during the copy/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, depending on the adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image. The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)." The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 45

05-535 to 537/820 to 822


Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the text peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation. By adjusting the text peak, an image becomes much blacker because pixels judged as "black" are increased. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-535 05-536 05-537 05-820 05-821 05-822 Applied to Text/Photo mode Photo mode Text mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the entire image becomes white. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the entire image becomes black. * * Default: 05-535: 246, 05-536: 254, 05-537: 236, 05-820: 246, 05-821: 236, 05-822: 254 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image black during the copy/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, and a dark area may be blurred, depending on the adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image. The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)." The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46

05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832


Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background peak and text peak to fixed/varied, by specifying the range correction method during the copy/scan operation. Once fixed peak is selected, the range correction is performed with the fixed values. The value of the background peak affects the reproducibility of the image background density. On the other hand, the value of the text peak affects the reproducibility of the text density. Perform this adjustment under the use conditions of the original glass, ADF and RADF in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-570 05-571 05-572 05-693 05-694 05-695 05-825 05-826 05-827 05-830 05-831 05-832 Applied to The original glass is used, text/photo mode The original glass is used, photo mode The original glass is used, text mode The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode The ADF/RADF is used, text mode The original glass is used, text/photo mode The original glass is used, text mode The original glass is used, photo mode The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode The ADF/RADF is used, text mode The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode Function mode Copy[

Scanner

Description
When these codes are used, the range correction method is specified by the one's and ten's place. Allocated in the one's place is for the automatic density mode, and the ten's place for manual density mode. Setting range for each digit is as shown below: Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied e.g. When the set value is "22," "the background peak is varied and the text peak is fixed" in both automatic density mode and manual density mode. * * Default: 05-570: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-571: 12, 05-572: 22, 05-693: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05694: 12, 05-695: 22, 05-825 to 827, 830 to 832: 12 Acceptable values: 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 31 to 34, 41 to 44

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density and the text density.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 47

05-593 to 595
Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust image contrast by correcting the gamma data slope during the copy operation. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-593 05-594 05-595 Applied to Copy function, text/photo mode Copy function, photo mode Copy function, text mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image contrast becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image contrast becomes lower. * * Default: 5 Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (0: Lowest contrast, 9: Highest contrast)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image contrast during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48

05-596 to 599
Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function)
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the gamma balance of the image density in three areas, low, medium, and high density areas, when the network printer function is used. Perform this adjustment in each halftone mode for each emulation by density area. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-596 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to Smooth mode, low density area Smooth mode, medium density area Smooth mode, high density area Detail mode, low density area Detail mode, medium density area Detail mode, high density area Smooth mode, low density area Smooth mode, medium density area Smooth mode, high density area Detail mode, low density area Detail mode, medium density area Detail mode, high density area Emulation PS

05-597

05-598

PCL

05-599

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density in the intended adjustment density area becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower. Turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then perform the printer operation to check the image quality. * * Default: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the image when the network printer function is used, and perform this adjustment.

Caution
The density of light text or a graphic image varies, if the medium or high density area is mainly adjusted. It is not affected, if the low density area is adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 49

05-600 to 602/869 to 871


Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background adjustment data and adjust the background density during the copy/scan operation. Perform this adjustment in each original mode. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-600 05-601 05-602 05-869 05-870 05-871 Applied to Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Text/photo mode Text mode Photo mode Function mode Copy

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the background becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the background becomes darker. * * Default: 05-600 to 602: 3, 05-869: 4, 05-870: 6, 05-871: 4 Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (1: Darker background (reproduced), 9: Lighter background (eliminated))

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density.

Caution
If the adjustment is performed to make the background lighter, a light area becomes lighter or eliminated. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image. The background density for the copy function may not vary so much, depending on "Range correction background peak adjustment (05-532 to 534)" and "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)".

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50

05-609
Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
Purpose
This code is used to switch the gamma table when paper is scanned from the ADF/RADF during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation. This code is used to adjust the image quality when an original is scanned from the ADF/RADF, to the one when the original is scanned from the original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased within the range between 1 and 4 except the default (0), the image becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image becomes darker. * * Default: 0 (Equivalent to the medium density between when the set value is 3 and when it is 4) Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (1: Darkest, 4: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the image quality when necessary, if there is a visible difference in density when the image is scanned from the original glass and when it is scanned from the ADF/RADF.

Caution
The original seen through the back of the page may be printed, and text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, when the ADF/RADF is used. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 51

05-620 to 623/865 to 867


Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
Theses codes are used to reset the filtering processing (a process performed to enhance edge of image data) intensity during the copy/scan operation, to make the image sharper or softer. Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected. The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-620 05-621 05-622 05-623 05-865 Sub code 0 1 2 05-866 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to Text/photo mode Photo mode, error diffusion Text mode Photo mode, dither Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40% Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80% Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100% Text mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40% Text mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80% Text mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100% Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40% Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80% Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100% Function mode Copy

Scanner

05-867

Description
When these codes are used, the filtering intensity is specified by the one's and the ten's place. The one's place is fixed in each original mode. As the ten's place is increased, a sharper image is printed. As it is decreased, a softer image is printed. Also, as it is decreased, moir is less likely to occur. One's place (filter shape): Fixed value (Filter for each original mode selected) Ten's place (sharpness intensity): 0 (sharpness at default) 1 to 9 (1: Softest, 9: Sharpest) * * Default: 05-620: EUR/UC: 1, JPN: 0, 05-621/623: 0, 05-865 to 867: 0 Acceptable values (ten's place): 0 to 9

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, perform this adjustment to make the image sharper or softer during the copy operation when necessary. Perform this adjustment if insufficient sharpness adjustment causes degradation in the image quality (moir, insufficient sharpness).

Caution
If the set value in the ten's place is too large, moir is more likely to occur on the printout. On the other hand, if it is too small, the image may be blurred (insufficient sharpness). Therefore, perform this adjustment to acquire the optimum image quality, while checking the printout.
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

05-648/654/655
Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer Function)
* Codes 05-645/655 are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to prevent smudged/faint text when the copy/network printer function is used to print. Perform this adjustment in each function mode regarding the following items: The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-648 05-654 05-655 Applied to Text/photo mode PS printing PCL printing Function mode Copy[ Printer^

Description
As the set value is increased, the faint text is suppressed. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the smudged text is suppressed. When performing this adjustment for the printer function, turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then perform the printer operation to check the printout. * * Default (copy function): 05-648: 3 Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (0: Maximum smudged text suppression, 4: Maximum faint text suppression) Default (printer function): 05-654/655: 5 Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (0: Maximum faint text suppression, 9: Maximum smudged text suppression)

* *

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to suppress the smudged/faint text and thin lines, when the copy/network printer function is used to print.

Caution
Note that the image quality and life of replacement parts may not meet the specifications when a value other than the default is set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 53

05-664/665
Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function)
* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the upper limit of the printing density when the network printer function is used to print in toner save mode. By making the printing density lower, toner can be saved. Perform this adjustment in printer mode regarding the following items: The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-664 05-665 Applied to PS printing PCL printing

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing density becomes higher in toner save mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the printing density becomes lower. * * Default: 136 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density during the print operation in toner save mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

05-667/672/676/678
Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)
* * * Code 05-676 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Code 05-676 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed. Code 05-678 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the dot size by specifying the width of laser pulse, which is assigned to the beam levels. This is used for 4 divided smoothing (a process to reproduce smooth text and thin lines) when the copy/printer/fax reception function is used to print. The primary scanning direction is divided into four and the dot width is set at five levels including level "0." Perform this adjustment in function mode regarding the following items: The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code 05-667 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 Applied to Beam level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 Beam level 4/4 GDI printing, beam level 0/4 GDI printing, beam level 1/4 GDI printing, beam level 2/4 GDI printing, beam level 3/4 GDI printing, beam level 4/4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 0/4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 1/4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 2/4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 3/4 PS/PCL printing, beam level 4/4 Beam level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 Beam level 4/4 Function mode Copy

05-672

Printer

05-676

05-678

Fax

Description
As the set value is decreased, the beam width in the primary scanning direction becomes smaller and dots are reproduced in smaller size. * Default: 05-667-0: 0, 05-667-1: 19, 05-667-2: 25, 05-667-3: 31, 05-667-4: 44 05-672-0: 0, 05-672-1: 19, 05-672-2: 25, 05-672-3: 31, 05-672-4: 56 05-676-0: 0, 05-676-1: 19, 05-676-2: 25, 05-676-3: 31, 05-676-4: 44 05-678-0: 0, 05-678-1: 19, 05-678-2: 25, 05-678-3: 31, 05-678-4: 44 Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Smallest dots, 255: Largest dots)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the dot size in the primary scanning direction smaller, when copy/printer or fax function is used.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 55

Caution
Set the values to match the order of beam levels to the large and small set values. (Set the maximum value for beam level 4/4 and the minimum value for beam level 0/4.) The adjustment of beam level 4 affects the dot size the most.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56

3. Code in Setting Mode 08


List of 08 Setting Code
Code 08-202 08-203 08-204 08-205 08-206 08-209 08-219 08-224 to 228 08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 08-246 08-250 08-251 08-252 08-253 08-254 08-255 08-258 08-260 08-261 08-263 08-265 08-266 08-273 08-274 08-276 08-281 08-283 08-284 08-285 08-286 08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 08-300 08-305 to 308 08-312 to 314 08-315/316 08-320 to 323 08-327 to 329 08-330/332 08-335
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Content Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller Device Equipment Adjustment Mode Display Auto-Clear Timer Setting Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode) Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files (Scanner Function) Paper Size Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction) Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear Service Technician Telephone Number Setting Value of PM Counter Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing Error History Display LT<->A4/LD<->A3 PFP Installation FSMS Acceptance Web Data Retention Period Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray Administrator's Password Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting E-mail Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function) Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function) Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function) Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function) Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function) Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function) Raw Print Job Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function) Print Counter Display (by Paper Size) Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size) Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size) Scan Counter Display Display of Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function Display of Total Number of Pages

Page 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-40 3-41 3-43 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-1

Code 08-345 08-346 08-347/353 08-348/349 08-352 08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/ 1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/ 1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 08-381 08-388/389 08-400 08-404/405 08-407/411 08-409/448 08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 08-414 08-424/425 08-433/800/801/802/804/896 08-439 to 441/523/526 08-455 08-462 08-463 08-476/536/537/539 08-480 08-481 08-482 08-483 08-486 08-502 08-510 08-515/516 08-525/527/540/541 08-535 08-538 08-550 08-603 08-604 08-611 08-615 08-617 08-618

Content Count Setting of Envelope (PM) Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM) Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee Charging System Counter) Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM) Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter) Drawer Counter Display PM Management Setting

Page 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56

External Counter Function Copying Total Counter Fuser Unit Error Status Counter Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by Paper Type) Toner Density Correction Switching Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in Ready State Temperature Control Lower Limit Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper Type) Toner Supply Amount Correction Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy MixedSized Original on RADF (A/B Format) Light Control Status Temperature Drop Setting during Printing Default Setting of Paper Source Automatic Paper Source Selection Feeding Retry Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor PreRunning Rotation Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode Automatic FAX Transmission Temperature Setting during Warming-up Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during Printing Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time) Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function) Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function) Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy Function) APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function) Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function) Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function) Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)

3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-69 3-70 3-71 3-73 3-74 3-76 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-82 3-83 3-84 3-86 3-87 3-88 3-89 3-90 3-91 3-92 3-93 3-94

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2

Code 08-631 08-638 08-641 08-642 08-649 08-650 08-655 08-660/661 08-666 08-669 08-672 08-684/686 08-685 08-690 08-691 08-693 08-695 08-698 08-699 08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 08-712/713/714 08-767 to 771/775 to 778 08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 08-830/868/869 08-831/870/871 08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 08-838 08-839 08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 08-886 08-900/906 08-905 08-921/1951 08-922/923 08-945 08-947 08-949 08-970 08-971 08-973 08-995 08-1002

Content Custom Mode Setting Time Differences Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using ADF/RADF) (Copy Function) Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function) Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function) 2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy Function) Reset 05/08 Codes Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail BOX Partition Clearing System All Clearing Initialization of Department Management Information Rebuilding Databases Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation CF Formatting Template Function Setting Initialization of NIC Information Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports Embedded IC chip) Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting 250 sheets limitation for output pages Service Notification Function Setting Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/ Fax Function) Transfer DC Correction Separation DC Output Correction Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function) Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching Correction by Temperature/Humidity Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function) Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time) ROM Version Display Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at Duplex Copying FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF Initialization when Software is Upgraded Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode Toner Near Empty Threshold Value PCL Line Feed Code Setting Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display Selection of NIC Board Status Information

Page 3-95 3-96 3-97 3-98 3-99 3-101 3-102 3-103 3-104 3-105 3-106 3-107 3-108 3-109 3-110 3-111 3-112 3-113 3-114 3-115 3-118 3-119 3-120 3-122 3-123 3-124 3-126 3-127 3-128 3-129 3-130 3-131 3-132 3-133 3-134 3-135 3-136 3-137 3-138 3-139 3-140 3-141

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-3

Code 08-1003 08-1006 to 1010/1112 08-1011/1012 08-1013 08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 08-1017 to 1019 08-1020 08-1024/1025 08-1026 to 1029 08-1030 to 1032 08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 08-1055 08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 08-1073/1074 08-1075 to 1077 08-1078 to 1088 08-1093 to 1096 08-1114 08-1123 08-1124 08-1141 08-1144 08-1149 08-1372 08-1378 08-1380 08-1382 08-1385/1386/1388 08-1410 08-1428 08-1440 08-1447 08-1448 08-1449 08-1450 08-1451 08-1628 08-1882 08-1913 08-1952 to 1955 08-1960 to 1979 08-1989 08-1990

08-1991

Content Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting TCP/IP IPX/SPX Availability of NCP Burst AppleTalk DNS DDNS Desired Level Name of WINS Server NetWare HTTP SMTP POP3 FTP SNMP Raw TCP Print LPD Print IPP Print NetWare Print Text Transmission of Internet FAX NT Domain ON/OFF Setting Workgroup Name Display of MAC Address Processing in the event of Memory Full Error Enhanced Bold for PCL6 Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Cleaning Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing IP Conflict Detect IPP admin Name IPP admin Password IPP authentication method User name for IPP authentication Password for IPP authentication Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount Initialization of the Scan Memory Area Function Clear LED Flashing Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version Display IP Address Range for IP Filter Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The Domain Name Server Option (6) Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

Page 3-142 3-143 3-144 3-145 3-146 3-147 3-148 3-149 3-150 3-151 3-152 3-154 3-155 3-156 3-158 3-159 3-160 3-162 3-163 3-164 3-165 3-166 3-167 3-168 3-169 3-170 3-171 3-172 3-173 3-174 3-175 3-176 3-177 3-178 3-179 3-180 3-181 3-182 3-183 3-184 3-185 3-186 3-187 3-188

3-189

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4

Code 08-1993

08-1994

08-1996

Content Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address

Page 3-190

3-191

3-192

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-5

08-202
Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller Device
Purpose
The equipment can be equipped with external counters, such as a coin controller, copy key card, and key copy counter. With any of these counters installed, it is required to use this code to have the equipment detect a type of the counter installed.

Description
When this code is used, a type of counter installed on the equipment is detected. 0: No external copy counter/controller device 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card 3: Key copy counter * Default: 0

Setting Timing
When any of the above counters is installed on the equipment or when any of the above counter types is changed, use this code to reset the set value.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6

08-203
Equipment Adjustment Mode Display
Purpose
There are two types of modes; shipment adjustment mode used in the field after a factory shipment and a line adjustment mode used before a factory shipment. This code is used to check in which adjustment mode the equipment is set. Since the shipment adjustment mode is set for the field, it is not necessary to perform this code. Leave the default (factory shipment adjustment mode).

Description
When this code is used, the adjustment mode of the equipment (adjustment mode for factory shipment / line adjustment mode) can be checked. 0: For factory shipment 1: For line * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the adjustment mode of the equipment.

Caution
Leave the default ("0" for factory shipment) for this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-7

08-204
Auto-Clear Timer Setting
Purpose
If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during or after the copy operation, etc., the auto-clear function will automatically reset the current copy settings to the default settings and display the basic screen. This code is used to reset a desired period of time until the auto-clear function starts up.

Description
When this code is used, a period of time from the last button operation until the start-up of the autoclear function is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled. 0: Auto-clear function disabled 1: 15 seconds 6: 90 seconds 2: 30 seconds 7: 105 seconds 3: 45 seconds 8: 120 seconds 4: 60 seconds 9: 135 seconds 5: 75 seconds 10: 150 seconds * Default: 3 (45 seconds) *

11: 180 seconds 12: 210 seconds 13: 240 seconds 14: 270 seconds 15: 300 seconds

On the e-STUDIO165/205, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up is set according to the following operation: To set on the control panel: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO CLEAR] To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed): [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Clear]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up or to disable the auto-clear function.

Caution
When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled. The current settings (displayed on the control panel) applied to the last operation are retained until the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8

08-205
Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting
Purpose
Energy saver mode is intended to automatically lower the temperature of the fuser unit in order to reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable energy saver mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the equipment switches to energy saver mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "0" is set, energy saver mode is disabled. e-STUDIO163/203: 0: Disabled 1: Reserved 2: 1 minute 3: Reserved 4: 2 minutes 5: Reserved 6: 4 minutes * Default: 11

7: Reserved 8: 5 minutes 9: Reserved 10: 10 minutes 11: 15 minutes 12: 20 minutes

13: 25 minutes 14: 30 minutes 15: 35 minutes 16: 40 seconds 17: 45 seconds 18: 50 minutes

19: 55 minutes 20: 60 minutes 21: 70 minutes 22: 80 minutes 23: 90 minutes 24: 100 minutes

25: 110 minutes 26: 120 minutes 27: 150 minutes 28: 180 minutes 29: 210 minutes 30: 240 minutes

e-STUDIO165/205: 0: Disabled 1: Enabled * Default: 1 * The period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode is set according to the following operation: The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203. To set on the control panel: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO POWER SAVE] To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed): [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Power Save]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver mode.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-9

08-206
Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode)
Purpose
Sleep mode is intended to automatically turn the fuser unit OFF in order to reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable sleep mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. However, power is supplied to the optional boards including the FAX Kit and Network Printer Kit in sleep mode, therefore, the equipment starts up when a fax is received or a request to print from the network is made.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the equipment switches to sleep mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "23" is set for the e-STUDIO163/203 and 0 for the eSTUDIO165/205, sleep mode is disabled. e-STUDIO163/203: 0: 3 minutes 6: 30 minutes 1: 5 minutes 7: 35 minutes 2: 10 minutes 8: 40 minutes 3: 15 minutes 9: 45 minutes 4: 20 minutes 10: 50 minutes 5: 25 minutes 11: 55 minutes * Default: 3

12: 60 minutes 13: 70 minutes 14: 80 minutes 15: 90 minutes 16: 100 seconds 17: 110 seconds

18: 120 minutes 19: 150 minutes 20: 180 minutes 21: 210 minutes 22: 240 minutes 23: Disabled

e-STUDIO165/205: 0: Disabled 1: Enabled * Default: 1 * The period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode is set according to the following operation: The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203. To set on the control panel: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO SLEEP] To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed): [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Sleep/Auto Shut Off]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10

08-209
Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 11

08-219
Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used to store the scanned original data in a shared folder.

Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF 2: Reserved 3: TIFF (Single) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the scanned original data is stored in a shared folder.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12

08-224 to 228
Paper Size
* Codes 08-225, 227 and 228 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of paper loaded in each drawer and the bypass tray. This allows the APS (Automatic Paper Selection), paper transport and jam detection to be performed, depending on paper size. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-224 08-225 08-226 08-227 08-228 Applied to Paper size for the bypass tray Paper size for the drawer Paper size for the PFU drawer Paper size for the PFP upper drawer Paper size for the PFP lower drawer

Description
When these codes are used, the equipment detects the size of paper loaded in each paper source. Set value = Size of paper to be loaded 0: A3 4: B4 8: LT-R 12:COMP 1: A4 5: B5 9: LD 13: FOLIO 2: A4-R 6: B5-R 10: LG 14: Non-standard 3: A5-R 7: LT 11: ST-R 15: Postcard * 14 and 15 can be selected only for the paper size for the bypass tray (08-224). * Default: Bypass tray: Drawer: PFU Drawer: PFP upper Drawer: PFP lower Drawer:

14 (No particular size is specified) UC: 7, Others: 1 UC: 7, Others: 1 UC: 7, Others: 1 UC: 7, Others: 1

The paper size is set on the control panel according to the following operation: e-STUDIO163/203: Press [DRAWER] + [COPY] for two seconds --> [DRAWER] --> [COPY] e-STUDIO165/205: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [DRAWER SIZE]

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the paper size for each drawer.

Caution
If the paper size different from the actual size of paper loaded is set for 08-225 to 228, a jam may occur and the back of paper may be smudged.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 13

08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471


Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction)
* Codes 08-337 to 341 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of each type of paper in mm in the feeding direction and widthwise direction. The values set here are also used to define the range of an image printed on paper. * Paper feeding is controlled based on the paper size selected; therefore, the actual paper size must correspond with the set value. Unless the actual paper size corresponds with the set value, a jam may be generated during the paper feed operation.

Description
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-229 08-230 08-231 08-232 08-233 08-234 08-235 08-236 08-237 08-238 08-239 08-240 08-241 08-242 08-244 08-245 08-337 08-338 08-339 08-340 08-341 08-471 Applied to Paper size (A3-R) Paper size (A4-R) Paper size (A5-R) Paper size (B4) Paper size (B5-R) Paper size (LT-R) Paper size (LD) Paper size (LG) Paper size (ST-R) Paper size (COMPUTER) Paper size (FOLIO) Paper size (13 LG) Paper size (8.5 x 8.5) Paper size (Non-standard) Paper size (8K) Paper size (16K-R) Paper size (Envelope: COM10-R) Paper size (Envelope: DL-R) Paper size (Envelope: Monarch-R) Paper size (Envelope: CHO-3-R) Paper size (Envelope: YOU-3-R) Paper size (Postcard) Default (Feeding/ widthwise) 420/297 297/210 210/148 364/257 257/182 279/216 432/279 356/216 216/140 356/257 330/210 330/216 216/216 432/279 390/270 270/195 241/105 220/110 191/98 235/120 235/105 148/100 Acceptable value 140 to 432

105 to 432 140 to 432 140 to 432 105 to 432 105 to 432 98 to 432 105 to 432 105 to 432 100 to 432

The value for each code in the feeding direction and widthwise direction varies according to sub code. (0: Feeding direction, 1: Widthwise direction)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use a special paper size (other than that listed in the above table) in each drawer (this operation is not guaranteed).

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14

08-246
Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to clear the copy job entered, when the auto-clear period of time passes while the copy operation is suspended.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically clear the copy job is reset. 0: Does not clear 1: Clears * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to automatically clear the copy job.

Caution
No copy job is cleared even if the auto-clear period of time passes during the menu operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 15

08-250
Service Technician Telephone Number
Purpose
When a service call appears, a telephone number of a service technician can be displayed on the control panel. No telephone number is displayed by default. This code is used to enter and display the telephone number.

Description
When this code is used, a telephone number of a service technician is entered, and displayed on the screen when a service call appears. Set value = Telephone number of a service technician * * Acceptable value: 20-digit numeric value Default: 0 (No telephone number is displayed)

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the telephone number when a service call appears.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16

08-251
Setting Value of PM Counter
Purpose
The Preventive Maintenance (PM) needs to be performed to clean the parts, lubricate the driving units and replace consumables. This code is used to specify the PM cycle (copy counts). At the moment when the PM counter value of "Current value of PM counter display/0 clearing (08-252)" reaches the set value for the code, the message will appear, prompting for the PM.

Description
When this code is used, the PM cycle (copy counts) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set value = Copy counts prompting for the PM 0: Message will not appear, prompting for the PM 1 to 99999999 (copy counts) * Default: e-STUDIO163: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000 e-STUDIO165: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000 e-STUDIO205: JPN: 0, Others: 90,000

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM cycle.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 17

08-252
Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing
Purpose
The PM counter is intended to count the number of copies as a guide for estimating the next PM (Preventive Maintenance) timing. This code is used to display and to check the current PM counter value for estimating the general PM timing. In addition, when "0" is set after the PM is performed, the counter will be reset to 0 and incremented again, which helps to estimate the next PM timing.

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the PM counter is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Note that only "0" can be manually entered to reset the PM counter to 0, after the PM is performed. 0: Clear the counter 1 to 99999999 (copy counts) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the current counter value to 0, after the PM is performed.

Caution
Reset the counter to 0, only after performing the PM. Otherwise, the next PM timing cannot be accurately estimated. The image quality may be reduced and some failure may occur in the equipment. The PM counter value is stored in the SRAM board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18

08-253
Error History Display
Purpose
During the equipment operation, if an error occurs, the type of error, time when the error occurred, current reproduction ratio and paper source for recording paper, etc., are stored as error data. This code is used to display data for the last 8 errors on the control panel in order to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error.

Description
When this code is used, data for the last 8 errors are listed on the screen. Error data is shown, as indicated below: EA10 Error code 03 07 26 17 5 32 Y/M/D/H/M/S (4 digits) (12 digits) 064 064 2 3 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 MMM NNN A BCD EF H I J L O (3 digits) (3 digits) (11 digits)

The table below shows the descriptions of the symbols:


MMM NNN A Reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (M x 256) + (M x 16) + M Reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (N x 256) + (N x 16) + N Paper source 0: Not used 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Not used 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Not used 7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7- A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope) Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope) S: CHO-3 (Envelope) T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not used Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Not used 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not used 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not specified 1: Book 2: Double-sided /simplex printing 4: Double-sided/Duplex printing 8: Single-sided/ Duplex printing Image shift 0: Not used 1: Book-type 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Mode 2: Black

C D E F

H I J L

The error records displayed on the e-STUDIO163/203 are switched using the [ZOOM] ([25%] / [[200%]] button.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error, for the purpose of analyzing a cause for the error.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 19

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20

08-254
LT<->A4/LD<->A3
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the network printer function is used to print, this code is used to specify whether or not to print on a different size of paper, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to print a document, which should be printed on LT/LD-sized paper, on A4/A3-sized paper, is specified, unless LT/LD-sized paper is available, and vice versa. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (A message will appear to prompt a user to use a specified size of paper.) * Default: 0 * This is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation: [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer] --> [LT < --> A4/LD <--> A3]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify how to print out a document when the network printer function is used to print, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 21

08-255
PFP Installation
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the installation condition of the optional PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal). The PFP is automatically recognized; therefore, use this code in the following cases: Case 1: To reset from "2: PFP dual-drawer type installed" to "1: PFP single-drawer type installed" (When only the 2nd drawer of the PFP is broken, etc.) Case 2: To forcibly set to "4: Not installed" (When the 1st drawer or entire PFP is broken, etc.) Case 3: To install the new PFP from "4: Not installed" (When a replacement unit is installed in the condition in Case 2, etc.)

Description
When this code is use, the installation condition of the PFP is reset. 0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically) 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: Reserved 4: Not installed * Default: 0 * The PFP dual-drawer type is installed while 1 is set, 2 is automatically replaced with 1 at poweron.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the new PFP is installed.

Caution
If "0: Automatic is not set, perform this code according to the actual installation, when the PFP installation condition is reset (Cases 1 to 3 in Purpose). If this code is not performed, the PFP is not recognized as a setup product. Regarding Case 3 in Purpose, remove the failed unit (disconnect electrically), in order to install a replacement unit in the condition of Case 2. Then set to "0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically)" and install the replacement unit for the PFP.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22

08-258
FSMS Acceptance
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The utility software, FSMS (Field Service Manager System) allows a service technician to download firmware to update, via a PC connected to the equipment. Before that, it is necessary to permit the FSMS connection.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the FSMS connection is specified. In addition, a type of communication interface is selected. 0: Prohibited 1: Permitted (serial connection only) 2: Permitted (serial and USB connections) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to permit the FSMS connection, in order to use the FSMS to update firmware.

Caution
Connect the FSMS to the equipment while "1" is set, when the USB is used. (The communication interface is automatically switched to the USB connection during communications)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 23

08-260
Web Data Retention Period
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time during the entry operation on the TopAccess, data, which is being entered, is automatically reset. This code is used to set the period of time until data is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the timeout period, which is being entered on the TopAccess, is reset. If a timeout occurs, data, which is being entered, is reset. Set value = Timeout period 0 to 999 (minutes) * Default: 10 (minutes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the value, which is being entered on the TopAccess, reaches the timeout and is reset.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24

08-261
Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Description
When this code is used, the operation to fix a paper size for the bypass tray is set. With the main switch turned OFF or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button pressed, unless a paper size is fixed, [Non-standard] is set. If it is fixed, the paper size set for code 08-224 is set. 0: Size not fixed (bypass non-standard mode) 1: Size fixed (bypass fixed mode) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 25

08-263
Administrator's Password
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
A user (or an administrator of the equipment) authorized to access the equipment management functions on the TopAccess, is limited. This code is used to display the administrator's password, which needs to be entered, in order to access the management functions.

Description
When this code is used, the administrator's password is displayed. Set value = Administrator's password (6- to 10- digit numeric value) * * * Acceptable values: 0000000000 to 9999999999 Default: 123456

The administrator's password is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation: [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Administrators Password]

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the administrator's password.

Caution
If a new password is registered or reset, remember to inform the equipment administrator of the new password.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26

08-265
Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation. If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum data capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows exceeding file capacity, appears.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation. 2 to 30 (Mbytes) * Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error message is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 27

08-266
Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet. If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows exceeding file capacity, appears.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet. 2 to 30 (Mbytes) * Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error message is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28

08-273
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting E-mail
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a 2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

Description
When this code is used, the e-mail transmission partial size is reset. 0: Not divided 1: 64k bytes 2: 128k bytes 3: 256k bytes 4: 512k bytes 5: 1024k bytes 6: 2048k bytes * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at e-mailing (08-265)" (2 to 30Mbytes).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 29

08-274
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted through the Internet, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a 2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

Description
When this code is used, the Internet FAX transmission partial size is reset. 0: Not divided 1: 256k bytes 2: 512k bytes 3: 1024k bytes 4: 2048k bytes * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted through the Internet.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX (08-266)" (2 to 30Mbytes).

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

08-276
Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the initial value of the density adjustment button, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: Automatic density 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 31

08-281
Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the scanning resolution, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400 dpi 4: 600 dpi * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32

08-283
Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: Text 1: Text/photo 2: Photo * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 33

08-284
Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the duplexing mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the duplexing mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: Single 1: Book (left/right margin) 2: Tablet (top/bottom margin) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the duplexing mode, which is used by priority during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34

08-285
Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the image rotation mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: 0 degree (OFF) 1: 90 degrees (ON) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 35

08-286
Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original size, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset. 0: Automatic 1: Size mixed * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36

08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979


Raw Print Job
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify the print properties, which are used, when a Raw print job is sent to the printer. The Raw print job refers to a print job, which does not contain any special print job information, such as a print job sent to the printer when the printer driver (PCL or PS) is not used. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-290 08-291 08-292 08-293 08-296 08-297 08-298 08-299 08-978 08-979 Applied to Duplex Paper Size Paper Type Paper Orientation Number of Form Lines PCL Font Pitch PCL Font Size PCL Font Number Drawer PCL Symbol Set

Description
08-290: Duplex This code is used to specify duplex printing for the Raw print job. 0: Valid (duplex) 1: Invalid (simplex) * Default: 1 08-291: Paper Size This code is used to specify a paper size for the Raw print job. 0: LD 4: ST 8: Reserved 12: 13 LG 1: LG 5: A3 9: B4 2: LT 6: A4 10: B5 3: COMP 7: A5 11: FOLIO * Default: UC: 2, EUR/JPN: 6 08-292: Paper Type This code is used to specify a paper type for the Raw print job. 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Reserved 4: Transparency film * Default: 0

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 37

08-293: Paper Orientation This code is used to specify a paper orientation for the Raw print job. 0: Portrait 1: Landscape * Default: 0 08-296: Number of Form Lines This code is used to specify the line feed width. 500 to 12,800: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch) * Default: 1,200 (12 points) 08-297: PCL Font Pitch This code is used to specify the number of characters per inch, when the fixed-pitch font is used. 44 to 9,999: Unit: 1/100 CPI (character per inch) * Default: 1,000 (10 CPI) 08-298: PCL Font Size This code is used specify the font size, when the proportional font is used 400 to 99,975: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch) * Default: 1,200 (12 points) 08-299: PCL Font Number This code is used to specify a PCL font number used for the Raw print job. 0 to 79 * Default: 0 (Courier is used.) 08-978: Drawer Display This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job. 0: AUTO 1: Drawer 2: PFU drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer * Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

08-979: Symbol Set Display This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job. 0: Roman-8 20: Pi Font 1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 21: Legal 2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 23: ISO 6:ASCII 4: PC-8, Code Page 437 24: ISO 11 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian 25: ISO 15: Italian 6: PC-850, Multilingual 26: ISO 17 7: PC-852, Latin2 27: ISO 21: German 8: PC-8 Turkish 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 29: ISO 69: French 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 31: MC Text 12: DeskTop 32: PC Cyrillic 13: PS Text 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 14: Ventura International 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 15: Ventura US 35: PC-775 16: Microsoft Publishing 36: PC-1004 17: Math-8 37: Symbol 18: PS Math 38: Windows Baltic 19: Ventura Math 39: Wingdings * Default: 0 * The above Raw print jobs are set on the TopAccess according to the following operation: [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the print properties for the Raw print job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 39

08-300
Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum copy count when multiple copies are made per job.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum copy count per job is specified. Set value = Maximum copy count 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum copy count per job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

08-305 to 308
Print Counter Display (by Paper Size)
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (print counts) of the print counters (copy counter, Fax counter, printer counter and list counter) by paper size. This is done according to "Count setting of large size paper (08-352)" and "Definition setting of large size paper (08-353)." The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: [Copy counter (by paper size): Print counts]
Code 08-305 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13 LG 8.5 x 8.5 16K 8K Others Function mode Copy

[Printer counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code 08-306 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Printer

[List counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code 08-307 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Printer

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 41

[Fax counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code 08-308 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each print counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value. Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

08-312 to 314
Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size)
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (scan counts) of the scan counters (copy counter, network counter and Fax counter) by paper size. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: [Copy counter (by paper size): Scan counts]
Code 08-312 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Copy

[Scanner counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code 08-313 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Scanner

[Fax counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code 08-314 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Fax

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 43

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

Caution
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

08-315/316
Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (transmission/reception counts) of the Fax communication counters by paper size. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: [Fax transmission counter (by paper size): Fax transmission counts]
Code 08-315 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Fax

[Fax reception counter (by paper size): Fax reception counts]


Code 08-316 Sub code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Applied to A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG Sub code 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Applied to LT ST COMP 13" LG 8.5" x 8.5" 16K 8K Others Function mode Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmission/reception count is calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value. Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 45

08-320 to 323
Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size)
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The print counters include a copy counter, a printer counter, a list counter and a Fax counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate print counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current value of each print counter. * The print counters can also be displayed by the operation on the control panel. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-320 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to Copy counter (large size) Copy counter (small size) Copy counter (total) Printer counter (large size) Printer counter (small size) Printer counter (total) List counter (large size) List counter (small size) List counter (total) Fax counter (large size) Fax counter (small size) Fax counter (total) Function mode Fax

08-321

Printer

08-322

08-323

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows. Small size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed. Large size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed. However, the print counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed. * Large size paper setting (08-353) * Large size paper double count setting (08-352) Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

08-327 to 329
Scan Counter Display
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The scan counters include a copy counter, a scanner counter, and a Fax counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate scan counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current value of each scan counter. * Scan counts of each counter can be displayed by the operation on the control panel. However, these codes are used to display scan counts by small/large size. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-327 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to Copy counter (large size) Copy counter (small size) Copy counter (total) Fax counter (large size) Fax counter (small size) Fax counter (total) Scanner counter (large size) Scanner counter (small size) Scanner counter (total) Function mode Copy

08-328

Fax

08-329

Scanner

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows. Small size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is scanned. Large size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is scanned. * Large size paper setting (08-353) Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 47

08-330/332
Display of Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The Fax counters include a transmission and a reception counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate Fax transmission/reception counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current values of Fax transmission/reception counters. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-330 Sub code 0 1 2 0 1 2 Applied to Fax transmission counts (large size) Fax transmission counts (small size) Fax transmission counts (total) Fax reception counts (large size) Fax reception counts (small size) Fax reception counts (total) Function mode Fax

08-332

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. * * 0 to 99999999 Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows. Small size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is transmitted/ received by Fax. Large size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is transmitted/received by Fax. * Large size paper setting (08-353) Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmission/reception count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48

08-335
Display of Total Number of Pages
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The counter is intended to accumulate print counts for copy printing, printer printing, Fax printing, and list printing by paper size (small/large size). This code is used to display and check total counts by paper size. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-335 Sub code 0 1 2 Applied to Total counts (large size) Total counts (small size) Total counts (total)

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. The digital keys are used to enter the counter value. 0 to 99999999 * Default: 0 Counting conditions are as follows. Small size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed. Large size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed. However, the counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed and transmitted/received. * Large size paper setting (08-353) * Large size paper double count setting (08-352) Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check each counter value by paper size when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 49

08-345
Count Setting of Envelope (PM)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope. When the value set for "Paper size (feeding/widthwise direction) (08-337 to 341)" for an envelope, exceeds the length set for "Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)," the envelope is counted as a large size envelope.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope. 0: Increment the counter by 1 1: Increment the counter by 2 * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding). This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

08-346
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper. * The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper. 0: Increment the counter by 1 1: Increment the counter by 2 * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding). This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 51

08-347/353
Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee Charging System Counter)
Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, or the counters, which are involved in the PM such as the PM support related counters, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper. These codes are used to reset the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper. * Whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified in accordance with "Count setting of large size paper (08-346/352)." The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-347 08-353 Applied to Definition setting of large size paper (PM) Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)

Description
When these codes are used, the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper, is reset. 08-347: Definition setting of large size paper (PM) 0: A3, LD 1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP * Default: 1 08-353: Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter) 0: A3, LD 1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP, 8K * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing conditions.

Caution
The values set for these codes affect the following counters and PM support related counters (other than feeding). Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347) is set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts. Printing counter (by paper size) (08-305 to 308) Printing counter (by large/small size) (08-320 to 323) Scan counter (by large/small size) (08-327 to 329) FAX counter (by large/small size) (08-330/332) Display of total number of pages (08-335) Key copy counter Coin controller Copy Key Card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

08-348/349
Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM)
Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related life counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film (in transparency film mode) or thick paper (in thick paper 1 or 2 mode). The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-348 08-349 Applied to Count setting of thick paper (PM) Count setting of transparency film (PM)

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film or thick paper. 0: Increment the counter by 1 1: Increment the counter by 2 * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the life counters, when transparency film, thick paper 1 or thick paper 2 is used.

Caution
The values set for these codes affect the PM support related counters (other than feeding). These codes are set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 53

08-352
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper including a large size envelope. * The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-353)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper. 0: Increment the counter by 1 1: Increment the counter by 2 * Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing conditions.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the following counters: Printing counter (By paper size) (08-305 to 308) Printing counter (By large/small size) (08-320 to 323) Scan counter (By large/small size) (08-327 to 329) FAX counter (By large/small size) (08-330/332) Display of total number of pages (08-335) Key copy counter Coin controller Copy key card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411
Drawer Counter Display
* Codes 08-360, 370 and 372 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The drawer counters are intended to accumulate copy counts fed from the drawers. These codes are used to display and check the current values of the drawer counters. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-356 08-357 08-358 08-360 08-370 08-372 08-374 08-1411 Applied to Counter display for the drawer Counter display for the PFU drawer Counter display for the bypass tray (other than envelope) Counter display for the PFP upper drawer Counter display for the PFP lower drawer Counter display for the ADU Counter display for the ADF/RADF Counter display for the bypass tray (envelope)

Description
When these codes are used, the current values of the drawer counters are shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. 0 to 99999999 (copy counts) * Default: 0 Counting conditions are as follows. Drawer counter:The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of paper is copied or printed, regardless of the paper size.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check copy counts fed from the drawers, as a guide for replacing the drawer related PM parts (such as the pick-up roller).

Caution
The drawer counter values are stored on the SRAM board. If the SRAM board is replaced, refer to the data list in 08 SETTING code, use these codes to enter the current values, and restore the counters to the state before the replacement of the SRAM board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 55

08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/ 1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
PM Management Setting
* Codes 08-1312/1314/1320/1322/1328/1330 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to display each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regarding the target PM replacement parts. Remember to clear the codes of the parts replaced after replacing them. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications: [08-1150: Drum]
Code 08-1150 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Default Present copy counts 0 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000 e-STUDIO203: 90,000 e-STUDIO165: 72,000 e-STUDIO205: 90,000 Present driving counts 0 Recommended driving counts for replace180,000 ment Present copy counts for control 0 Present driving counts for control 0

3 4 6 7

Note: Only code 08-1150 is shown in the above table. Refer to the following pages for other codes and default values. The descriptions of "Description", "Setting Timing" and "Caution", are the same as for code 08-1150. Therefore, they are omitted.

Description
Perform the following settings regarding the target PM parts. Sub code 0: This sub code is used to display the copy counts accumulated up to present. Sub code 1: This sub code is used to specify the recommended copy counts for replacement. Sub code 3: This sub code is used to display the driving counts accumulated up to present. Sub code 4: This sub code is used to specify the recommended driving counts for replacement. Sub code 6: This sub code is used to display the copy counts for control accumulated up to present. Sub code 7: This sub code is used to display the driving counts for control accumulated up to present. Sub codes 0, 3, 6, 7: 0: Clears the counter 1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds)) * Default: 0 Sub codes 1, 4: 1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds)) * Default: Refer to the table.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

Setting Timing
Use these codes to display/reset each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regarding the target PM replacement parts.

Caution
The values for sub codes 0 and 6, 3 and 7 are the same. When a value for sub code 0 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 6. When a value for sub code 3 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 7 is updated. Likewise, when a value for sub code 6 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 0. When a value for sub code 7 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 3. When "0" is set for either of sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7, "0" is updated for all sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7.

[08-1158: Drum cleaning blade] [08-1172: Drum separation finger] [08-1174: Main charger grid] [08-1182: Needle electrode] [08-1200: Developer material] [08-1214: Transfer charger wire] [08-1224: Separation charger wire] [08-1336: Recovery blade]
Code 08-1158 08-1172 08-1174 08-1182 08-1200 08-1214 08-1224 08-1336 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Present copy counts Recommended copy counts for replacement Default 0 e-STUDIO163: 72,000 e-STUDIO203: 90,000 e-STUDIO165: 72,000 e-STUDIO205: 90,000 0 180,000 0 0

3 4 6 7

Present driving counts Recommended driving counts for replacement Present copy counts for control Present driving counts for control

The counter for code 08-1200 is automatically cleared and replacement counts are automatically counted up after "Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor (05-200)" is performed.

[08-1198: Ozone filter] [08-361: Upper fuser roller bushing] [08-1246: Fuser roller] [08-1250: Pressure roller] [08-1268: Fuser roller separation finger]
Code 08-361 08-1198 08-1246 08-1250 08-1268 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Present copy counts Recommended copy counts for replacement Default 0 e-STUDIO163: 72,000 e-STUDIO203: 90,000 e-STUDIO165: 72,000 e-STUDIO205: 90,000 0 180,000 0 0

3 4 6 7

Present driving counts Recommended driving counts for replacement Present copy counts for control Present driving counts for control

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 57

[08-1298: Feed roller (Drawer)] [08-1300: Feed roller (PFU drawer)] [08-1312: Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)] [08-1314: Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)] [08-1316: Separation roller (bypass tray)] [08-1320: Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)] [08-1322: Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)] [08-1328: Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)] [08-1330: Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)] [08-1332: Pickup roller (bypass tray)]
Code 08-1298 08-1300 08-1312 08-1314 08-1316 08-1320 08-1322 08-1328 08-1330 08-1332 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Present copy counts Recommended copy counts for replacement Default 0 80,000

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

08-381
External Counter Function
Purpose
This code is used to count the number of copies in each operation mode of the equipment, when the external counter is used. (The counter set for "Externally installed copy counter / Controller device (08202)" is used as the external counter.) Only the number of copies is counted by default when the copy function is used. However, when the setting is changed, the numbers of copies are counted when the Fax and printer functions are used.

Description
When this code is used, the counting target operation mode is reset. 0: Not selected (Does not count) 1: Copier 2: Fax 3: Copier/Fax 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/Fax 7: Copier/Printer/Fax * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the counting target operation mode of the external counter.

Caution
When this code is used to count the number of copies at the external counter, unless the external counter is connected, the operation mode specified cannot be used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 59

08-388/389
Copying Total Counter
Purpose
The total counter shows important values to operate this equipment (to calculate billing amounts). In case of any trouble, counter values are written into memory on the MAIN board and SRAM board in parallel, to avoid losing these values. These codes are used to alternatively copy counter values on the boards.

Description
When these codes are used, counter values are copied in the direction specified by codes entered. 08-388:This code is used to copy counter values on the MAIN board onto the SRAM board. 08-389:This code is used to copy counter values on the SRAM board onto the MAIN board.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to copy counter values onto the board where the counter values have been replaced, after replacing the MAIN board or SRAM board.

Caution
Remember to record the current counter values before copying counter values. Never confuse the copying direction to copy counter values on the replaced board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

08-400
Fuser Unit Error Status Counter
Purpose
When a fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45) occurs, the set value of the fuser status counter varies, depending on type of error. Displaying and checking the set value of the fuser status counter can analyze a cause for the error. If any of "2 to 9" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will not be operated for safety reasons. After the fuser unit related error is resolved, if "0" is set, the fuser unit will be operated as usual. If any of "10 to 19" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will be operated as usual, even if "0" is not set after the fuser unit related error is resolved. C41: Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON C43: Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment C44: Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment C45: Thermistor abnormality during printing C46 to C49: Reserved

Description
When this code is used, the current set value of the fuser status counter is displayed. Only "0" can be manually entered, in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation, after the fuser unit related error is resolved. For further reason why the counter value differs despite the same error code, refer to 5.1.7 or 5.1.8 [Fuser unit related service call] in the Service Handbook. 0: No error 1: C41 (Once) 2: C41 (Consecutively occurs) 3: C46 (Reserved) 4: C43 5: C44 6: C45 7: C44 8: C45 9: C44 * Default: 0 10: C47 (Reserved) 11: C47 (Reserved) 12: C48 (Reserved) 13: C49 (Reserved) 14: C47 (Reserved) 15: C48 (Reserved) 16: C49 (Reserved) 17: C47 (Reserved) 18: C48 (Reserved) 19: C49 (Reserved)

Setting Timing
Use this code to resolve the fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45). Resolve the error, and set "0" (or reset the counter), in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation.

Caution
Remember to resolve the fuser unit related error, and then reset to "0."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 61

08-404/405
Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-404 Sub code 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Applied to Center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop Side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-405

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature in the ready state is reset. * The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886). Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature in the ready state 0: No temperature drop in the ready state 1 to 10: Temperature drop in the ready state (-5 to -50 C) * Default: 08-404: 1, 08-405: 3 * Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-404-0 to 3: 1, 08-405-0 to 3: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in the ready state.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code. If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

08-407/411
Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state. (The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperature can be individually specified.) As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in the ready state. If the temperature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of printing. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-407 08-411 Applied to Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Side thermistor) Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state is reset. 0: 140 C 1: 145 C 2: 150 C 3: 155 C * Default: 6 4: 160 C 5: 165 C 6: 170 C 7: 175 C 8: 180 C 9: 185 C 10: 190 C 11: 195 C 12: 200 C

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the lower temperature, in order to reduce power consumption. Note that inconsistent fusing may occur if the lower temperature is set.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 63

08-409/448
Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller when the equipment switches to energy saver mode. The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified. As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in energy saver mode, but an extended period of time is required to start printing. On the contrary, as the higher temperature is set, more power consumption is necessary, but a less period of time is required to start printing. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-409 08-448 Applied to Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Side thermistor) Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode is reset. 0: OFF 1: 40 C 2: 50 C 3: 60 C * Default: 0 4: 70 C 5: 80 C 6: 90 C 7: 100 C 8: 110 C 9: 120 C 10: 130 C 11: 140 C 12: 150 C 13: 160 C

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the higher temperature, if an extended period of time is required to start printing by default. In this case, notify users that more power consumption is necessary.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521
Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by Paper Type)
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during the print operation, to provide stable and consistent fusing. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-410 08-413 08-437 08-438 08-450 08-451 08-452 08-453 08-520 08-521 Applied to Plain paper mode (Center thermistor) Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor) Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor) Transparency film mode (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode (Side thermistor) Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor) Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor) Transparency film mode (Side thermistor) Envelope mode (Center thermistor) Envelope mode (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller is reset by paper type and temperature control thermistor. 0: 140 C 5: 165 C 10: 190 C 1: 145 C 6: 170 C 11: 195 C 2: 150 C 7: 175 C 12: 200 C 3: 155 C 8: 180 C 13: 205 C 160 C 9: 185 C 14: 210 C * Default: 08-410/413: 6, 08-437: 9, 08-438: 6, 08-450/451: 6, 08-452: 9, 08-453: 6, 08-520/521: 9

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 65

08-414
Toner Density Correction Switching
Purpose
The auto-toner sensor is used to detect the toner density, and toner-supply operation is performed to maintain a constant toner density. When this code is used, the threshold value to supply toner and the toner density in the developer material vary. A problem such as insufficient image density is more likely to occur when the developer material reaches almost the end of its life, thus, this correction gradually increases the correction amount, depending on the life of the developer material.

Description
The relationship of the set value and the toner density is as follows: Life: approx.30,000 pages 0: Does not correct 1: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 3: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 7: -3 bit (approx. -0.6wt%) * Default: 0 Life: approx.60,000 pages 0: Does not correct 1: Does not correct 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. +0.5wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 5: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 7: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%) Life: approx.90,000 pages 0: Does not correct 1: Does not correct 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. -0.5 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%) 7: -5 bit (approx. - 1.0 wt%)

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the printing density is extremely high or low.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. If the toner density in the developer material is too low, the printing density becomes low. The carrier adheres to the drum and a scratch may occur on the drum. If the toner density in the developer material is too high, a problem such as toner scattering may occur. In addition, toner consumption is increased. Note that the image is not immediately affected even if the set value is reset. (The toner density in the developer material will not become higher or lower until a certain amount of print operation is performed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

08-424/425
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-404/405. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-424 Sub code 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Applied to Switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor) Switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor) Switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor) Switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor) Switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor) Switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor) Switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor) Switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

08-425

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state is reset. * The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886). Set value x 1 minute = Switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state 2 to 60: Temperature drop in the ready state (2 to 60 minutes later) * Default: 5 (15 minutes later)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in the ready state.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code. If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 67

08-433/800/801/802/804/896
Temperature Control Lower Limit
Purpose
These codes are used to set the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit. When these codes are used to reset the lower limit of the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-433 08-800 08-801 08-802 08-804 08-896 Sub code 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Applied to Plain paper mode at room temperature (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode at room temperature (Side thermistor) Transparency film mode (Center thermistor) Transparency film mode (Side thermistor) Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor) Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor) Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor) Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor) Envelope mode (Center thermistor) Envelope mode (Side thermistor) Plain paper mode at low temperature (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode at low temperature (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop is reset. 0: 130 C 5: 155 C 10: 180 C 1: 135 C 6: 160 C 11: 185 C 2: 140 C 7: 165 C 12: 120 C 3: 145 C 8: 170 C 4: 150 C 9: 175 C * Default: 08-433-0: 5, 08-433-1: 3, 08-800-0: 7, 08-800-1: 5, 08-801-0: 7, 08-801-1:5 08-802-0/1: 11, 08-804-0/1: 11, 08-896-0: 5, 08-896-1: 3

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quantities.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68

08-439 to 441/523/526
Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper Type)
Purpose
These codes are used to set a period of time required to print the first page (a pre-running time) by paper type, in order to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed. It is necessary to set a pre-running time and increase the temperature of the fuser roller, to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed. An extended period of time is set by default to give priority to the image quality. However, a shorter period of time can be set for users who do not desire to set an extended period of time required to print the first page. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-439 08-440 08-441 08-523 08-526 Applied to Thick paper 2 mode Plain paper mode Thick paper 1 mode Envelope mode Transparency film mode

Description
When these codes are used, a pre-running time required to print the first page is reset by paper type. 0: Invalid 4: 4 sec. 8: 8 sec. 12: 14 sec. 1: 1 sec. 5: 5 sec. 9: 9 sec. 13: 16 sec. 2: 2 sec. 6: 6 sec. 10: 10 sec. 14: 18 sec. 3: 3 sec. 7: 7 sec. 11: 12 sec. 15: 20 sec. * Default: 08-439: 10, 08-440: 0, 08-441: 10, 08-523: 10, 08-526: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set a smaller value (shorter time) in order to reduce a pre-running time required to print the first page. If the smaller value is set (shorter time), inconsistent fusing is more likely to occur.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 69

08-455
Toner Supply Amount Correction
Purpose
When the toner motor is rotated, toner is supplied to the developer. This code is used to correct the toner motor rotation period when toner is supplied, and the amount of toner supplied at one time.

Description
When this code is used, the toner motor rotation period is reset when toner is supplied. 0: 100% 1: 75% 2: 50% 3: 30% 4: 200% 5: 150% * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reduce the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time, when toner is supplied. Use this code to increase the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70

08-462
Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed-Sized Original on RADF (A/B Format)
* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
When an original with A4-R or FOLIO width (both 210 mm in width) is copied in mixed-sized original mode, either A4-R or FOLIO cannot be identified by their original widths, because they are the same. Therefore, detect their original lengths, in order to identify A4-R and FOLIO. The table below shows the combination of the switchback (transporting without scanning in reverse) setting status and the paper selection mode (APS/AMS) when an original with A4-R/FOLIO width is copied. As this table explains, since the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function does not apply in the default setting ("Invalid"), FOLIO is detected as A4-R when the AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is selected, and paper is fed from the A4-sized drawer. In other combinations, an A4-R/ FOLIO-sized original is detected properly regardless of the selection status of the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function. In other words, it is necessary to enable the transporting without scanning in reverse function, in order to detect a FOLIO-sized original properly, when the AMS is selected. [Paper size: A4-R/FOLIO]
Paper selection APS (Automatic Paper Selection) AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) Transporting without scanning in reverse / size detection Transporting without scanning in reverse Size selection Transporting without scanning in reverse Size selection "0" (Invalid) Not performed A4-R --> A4-R FOLIO --> FOLIO Not performed A4-R --> A4-R FOLIO --> A4-R "1" (Valid) Not performed A4-R --> A4-R FOLIO --> FOLIO Not performed A4-R --> A4-R FOLIO --> FOLIO

For the equipment destined for regions, where the LT-format original is applied, whenever LT-R/LG width is detected, an original is transported without scanning in reverse when the AMS is selected, regardless of the value set for this code.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to transport A4-R/FOLIO-sized originals without scanning in reverse is reset, when these mixed originals are placed on the ADF/RADF when the AMS is selected. 0: Invalid (Does not transport in reverse without scanning) 1: Valid (When the AMS is selected, the original length is detected by transporting without scanning in reverse, and FOLIO is identified properly) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to distinguish A4-R and FOLIO in mixed-sized original mode when the AMS is selected.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 71

Caution
This code is valid only for the equipment destined for regions, where the A/B-format original is applied. If "1" (Valid) is set, and, even when only A4-R-size originals are placed in mixed-sized original mode when the AMS is selected, these originals are transported in reverse without scanning. As a result, the original scanning speed is reduced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72

08-463
Light Control Status
Purpose
After performing Forced performing of peak detection (05-310) is performed, this code is used to display the end status and check the status of the exposure light source.

Description
When this code is used, the result on forced performing of peak detection is displayed. 0: Normal end 1: G-LED white level abnormality 2: G-LED peak detection abnormality 3: R-LED adjustment impossible 4: B-LED adjustment impossible 5: YG-LED adjustment impossible 6: White level abnormality 7: Black level abnormality * Normal operation: 0, in the case of an error: 1 to 7

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the details of the error, if an error occurs when forced performing of peak detection is executed

Caution
When an error occurs (0 to 7 is set), a service call appears. Therefore, replace the CIS unit.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 73

08-476/536/537/539
Temperature Drop Setting during Printing
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-476 Sub code 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Applied to Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-536

08-537

08-539

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature is reset when the printer function is used to print. * The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08535). Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature during the print operation 0: No temperature drop during the print operation 1 to 10: Temperature drop during the print operation (-5 to 50 C) * Default value: 08-476-0: 1, 08-476-1: 1, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1 08-536-0: 1, 08-536-1: 2, 08-536-2: 3, 08-536-3: 3 08-537-0: 1, 08-537-1: 2, 08-537-2: 3, 08-537-3: 5 08-539-0: 1, 08-539-1: 2, 08-539-2: 3, 08-539-3: 3 Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-476-0: 0, 08-476-1: 0, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1 08-536-0: 0, 08-536-1: 0, 08-536-2: 1, 08-536-3: 1 08-537-0: 0, 08-537-1: 0, 08-537-2: 0, 08-537-3: 1 08-539-0: 0, 08-539-1: 0, 08-539-2: 1, 08-539-3: 1

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code. If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 75

08-480
Default Setting of Paper Source
Purpose
This code is used to specify the paper source option, which is selected by priority, when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print. This set value is applied as the paper source, which is selected by default when the [COPY] or [APS/AMS] button is pressed, and as the paper source, which is used by priority when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print and the automatic paper source selection function is used to feed. * APS (Automatic Paper Selection): It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the size of an original and selecting a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.

Description
When this code is used, the paper source option by priority is reset. 0: Paper source where A4 or LT-size paper is loaded 1: Drawer 2: PFU drawer 3: PFP upper drawer 4: PFP lower drawer * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the paper source option, which is used by priority. * For instance, if A4-size bond paper and recycled paper are loaded in the separate drawers, use this code to select a drawer where recycled paper is loaded by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76

08-481
Automatic Paper Source Selection
Purpose
The automatic paper source change function is intended to switch to another paper source, where the same sized paper is loaded, if the selected paper source has run out of paper during the copy operation. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function is reset during the copy operation. 0: Enables 1: Disables * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the automatic paper source change function.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy function is used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 77

08-482
Feeding Retry
Purpose
It is hard to feed thick paper or transparency film, compared to plain paper. The equipment automatically retries to feed such hard-to-feed paper, in order to thoroughly feed it after it fails to feed. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry. * When this code is used to enable paper feed retry, up to five retries are performed.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable paper feed retry is reset. 0: Enables 1: Disables * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.

Caution
The number of retries cannot be reset. (Five retries are fixed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78

08-483
Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to switch the polygonal motor from its standby rotation (low speed rotation) to its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation), when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened. * If the polygonal motor switches to its normal rotation when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened, but the equipment does not start the operation to scan originals within a certain period of time, the polygonal motor goes back to its standby rotation. The period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation is set in "Timing of auto-cleaning of polygonal motor pre-running rotation (08-486)."

Description
When this code is used, the switching condition of the polygonal motor from its standby rotation to its normal rotation is reset. 0: Valid (when the original is placed on the RADF or the platen cover is opened) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (only when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the polygonal motor rotation state between its standby rotation and its normal rotation, if the original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 79

08-486
Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre-Running Rotation
Purpose
When the equipment does not perform the operation to scan originals for a certain period of time after the polygonal motor starts pre-running, the polygonal motor switches back from its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation) to its standby rotation (low speed rotation). This code is used to specify the period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation. * Polygonal motor pre-running is the function to switch the polygonal motor rotation from its standby rotation to its normal rotation when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened. This code is valid if "0" (default) or "2" is set for "Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor (08-483)."

Description
When this code is used, the period of time until the polygonal motor switches from its normal rotation to its standby rotation is reset. 0: 15 sec 1: 30 sec 2: 45 sec * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the period of time required to switch the polygonal motor from its normal rotation to its standby rotation when the equipment does not perform any operation for a certain period of time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 80

08-502
Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode
Purpose
This code is used to switch the image processing method, with "Photo" selected from among the original mode options, during the copy operation. Both the error diffusion and dither methods are intended to generate grayscale images using white and black pixels. But they have different principles. The dither method determines whether the dot is black or white on a dot-by-dot basis, in accordance with a particular rule, in response to a gradation of image pixels scanned in Photo mode, and represents grayscale images based on the ratio of black to white dots. On the other hand, the error diffusion method performs processing, depending on the target and surrounding pixels instead of on a dot-by-dot basis. It has an advantage of correcting irregularities of the target pixels by checking the surrounding ones. The dither method is used by default.

Description
When this code is used, the image processing method is reset in Photo mode during the copy operation. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the image processing method in Photo mode during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 81

08-510
Automatic FAX Transmission
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Fax Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically start scanning and transmit (automatically) an original placed on the equipment, when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is pressed during the fax transmission. In addition, this code is used to start fax transmission when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is pressed, and also the [START] button is pressed, in order to prevent improper transmission by users and protect security.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the automatic fax transmission function is reset. 0: Automatic transmission enabled (Use one-touch keys or press or the [SPEED DIAL] button to transmit a fax.) 1: Automatic transmission disabled (Use one-touch keys or press the [SPEED DIAL] button, and also press the [START] button to transmit a fax.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset automatic fax transmission.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 82

08-515/516
Temperature Setting during Warming-up
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified. As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced during warming-up. If the temperature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of printing. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-515 08-516 Applied to Temperature setting during warming-up (Center thermistor) Temperature setting during warming-up (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up is reset. 0: 140 C 1: 145 C 2: 150 C 3: 155 C 4: 160 C * Default: 9 5: 165 C 6: 170 C 7: 175 C 8: 180 C 9: 185 C 10: 190 C 11: 195 C 12: 200 C 13: 205 C 14: 210 C

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 83

08-525/527/540/541
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during Printing
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-476/536/ 537/539. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-525 Sub code 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Applied to Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor) Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor) Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

08-527

08-540

08-541

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop is reset when the printer function is used to print. * The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08535). Set value x 5 seconds = Switching time to control the temperature drop during the print operation 0: No temperature drop during the print operation 1 to 200: Temperature drop during the print operation (5 to 1,000 seconds later) * Default: 08-525-0: 20, 08-525-1: 38, 08-525-2: 75, 08-525-3: 75 08-527-0: 20, 08-527-1: 30, 08-527-2: 48, 08-527-3: 75 08-540-0: 20, 08-540-1: 48, 08-540-2: 100, 08-540-3: 100 08-541-0: 20, 08-541-1: 48, 08-541-2: 100, 08-541-3: 100

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 84

Caution
If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code. If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 85

08-535
Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time)
Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop when the printer function is used to print. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set, and a control pattern option is selected by paper type (plain paper, thick paper). When this code is used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-535 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Plain paper mode Thick paper mode

Thick paper 1 and 2, transparency film and envelope are included in thick paper mode.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) is reset when the printer function is used to print. 0: No temperature drop control 1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19 20: Temperature and timing selected optionally * Default: 08-535-0: 2, 08-535-1: 12 * * Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-535-0: 7, 08-535-1: 17 Patterns 1, 3 to 6, 8 to 11, 13 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing
Set 7 for code 07-535-0, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quantities of plain paper. Set 17 for code 07-535-1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quantities of thick paper. Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid: Temperature drop setting during printing (08-476/536/537/539) Temperature drop switching time setting during printing (08-525/527/540/541)

Caution
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 86

08-538
Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code used to specify the density adjustment value, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: Auto density adjustment 1: Manual density adjustment: Low density 3 (Light) 2: Manual density adjustment: Low density 2 3: Manual density adjustment: Low density 1 4: Manual density adjustment 0 (Center) 5: Manual density adjustment: High density 1 6: Manual density adjustment: High density 2 7: Manual density adjustment: High density 3 (Dark) * Default: 0 * On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in density adjustment mode is set according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [LIGHT/DARK]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up and during the copy operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 87

08-550
Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation. When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: Text/photo 1: Photo 2: Text * Default: 0 * On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in original mode is set according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [IMAGE MODE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up and during the copy operation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 88

08-603
Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is to specify the copy mode ("Selection of original single-sided/two sided feeding" and "Selection of simplex/duplex copying"), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when an original is placed on the RADF.

Description
When this code is used, the copy mode, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: Single-sided feeding to simplex copying (one-sided originals --> one-sided copies) 1: Single-sided feeding to duplex copying (one-sided originals --> two-sided copies) 2: Double-sided feeding to duplex copying (two-sided originals --> two-sided copies) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the copy mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 89

08-604
APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify which function is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, "APS (Automatic Paper Selection)" or "AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)" during the copy operation. * APS: It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the size of an original and selecting a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded. * AMS: It is intended to start printing while selecting a drawer where desired paper is loaded and automatically computing a reproduction ratio to fit into the size of paper.

Description
When this code is used, the function, which is used by priority, is reset. 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the function, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 90

08-611
Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the default which book-type original is selected as a reference, where oddnumbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side, with characters written horizontally, or where odd numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, in order to copy a book-type original in duplexing mode.

Description
When this code is used, the reference book-type original is reset. 0: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side (Copying starts from a left-hand page to a right-hand page.) 1: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side (Copying is performed from a right-hand page to a left-hand page.) * Default: 0 <Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side>

Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side

1st sheet

2nd sheet

3rd sheet

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side>

Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side

1st sheet

2nd sheet

3rd sheet

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the reference book-type original.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 91

08-615
Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the sizes of main memory and page memory. It is used to check that the equipment recognizes each memory properly.

Description
When this code is used, the sizes of main memory and page memory are displayed on the screen.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the sizes of main memory and page memory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 92

08-617
Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to accept printing until the department code is registered, when the printer function is used. Printing without registering the department code is performed by default. However, the department code is required once the department management code is registered.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to accept printing without registering the department code is reset when the printer function is used. 0: Prints forcibly (Accepts printing without entering the department code.) 1: Does not print (Does not accept printing without entering the department code.) * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to enable printing without entering the department code, when the printer function is used.

Caution
The set value is valid only when the department management function is set to "Valid."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 93

08-618
Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)
* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
Mixed original size mode is intended to place originals in different sizes on the RADF, scan and copy them at once. The mixed original size mode is available when the [MIXED SIZE] button is pressed on the control panel. This code is used to specify whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority while it is selected by default.

Description
hen this code is used, whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority is reset. 0: Same size originals (Without [MIXED SIZE] selected) 1: Mixed size originals (With only [MIXED SIZE] selected) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to select the mixed original size mode by default.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 94

08-631
Custom Mode Setting
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the selecting button B is pressed on the main screen during the copy operation, the copy function registered as a custom function is selected. Either of the FINISHING, DUPLEXING, 2IN1/ 4IN1, IMAGE SHIFT, DUAL PAGE or ID CARD function is allocated to this custom function. This code is used to specify the copy function, which is allocated as a custom function.

3
Description
When this code is used, the copy function, which is registered as a custom function, is reset. 0: FINISHING 1: DUPLEXING 2: 2IN1-4IN1 3: IMAGE SHIFT 4: DUAL PAGE 5: ID CARD * Default: 0 * On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the custom function is set according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MENU CUSTOMIZE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the custom function.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 95

08-638
Time Differences
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify an appropriate time zone of a region, where the equipment is installed, in accordance with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The set value is applied to DATE in the header information when e-mail is transmitted or when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

Description
When this code is used, the time zone of the region, where the equipment is installed, is reset 0: +12.0 H 16: +4.0 H 32: -4.0 H 1: +11.5 H 17: +3.5 H 33: -4.5 H 2: +11.0 H 18: +3.0 H 34: -5.0 H 3: +10.5 H 19: +2.5 H 35: -5.5 H 4: +10.0 H 20: +2.0 H 36: -6.0 H 5: +9.5 H 21: +1.5 H 37: -6.5 H 6: +9.0 H 22: +1.0 H 38: -7.0 H 7: +8.5 H 23: +0.5 H 39: -7.5 H 8: +8.0 H 24: 0.0 H 40: -8.0 H 9: +7.5 H 25: -0.5 H 41: -8.5 H 10: +7.0 H 26: -1.0 H 42: -9.0 H 11: +6.5 H 27: -1.5 H 43: -9.5 H 12: +6.0 H 28: -2.0 H 44: -10.0 H 13: +5.5 H 29: -2.5 H 45: -10.5 H 14: +5.0 H 30: -3.0 H 46: -11.0 H 15: +4.5 H 31: -3.5 H 47: -11.5 H * Default: JPN (Japan Standard Time): 6 UC (Pacific Standard Time): 40 EUR (UTC or Coordinated Universal Time): 24 * The time zone is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation: [Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Date & Time]

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the time zone is reset because the equipment is relocated to another region.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless the equipment is relocated to another region.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 96

08-641
Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using ADF/RADF) (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used to copy.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority, is reset when the ADF/RADF is used. 0: Non-sort 2: Sort 4: Rotate Sort * Default: 2 * 4 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode option, which is used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the ADF/RADF. Use "Default setting of sorter mode (08-642)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the original glass, or when the auto-clear function starts up or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 97

08-642
Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation, is reset. 0: Non-sort 1. Group 5: Rotate Sort 6: Magazine Sort * Default: 1 * 5 and 6 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the original glass, or when the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF Use "Automatic sorting mode setting (when using ADF/RADF) (08641)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 98

08-649
Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function)
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side of the copy set, with characters written horizontally or on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, when the magazine sort function is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side or left-hand side of the copy set is reset when the magazine sort function is used. 0: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the right-hand side 1: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the left-hand side * Default: 0 Example: When a 12-page original is magazine sorted <To lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages are laid on its right-hand side

<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the left-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages are laid on its left-hand side

The page layout when the magazine sort function is used is set according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MAGAZINE SORT]

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 99

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the page layout, when the magazine sort function is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 100

08-650
2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy Function)
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the page layout, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the page layout, which is used by priority, is reset when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used. 0: Original with characters written horizontally 1: Original with characters written vertically * Default: 0 <Example: When the 2 -in-1 function is used to copy>
Original with characters written horizontally
Copy image Orientation of the originals

Original with characters written vertically

<Example: When the 4 -in-1 function is used to copy>


Original with characters written horizontally Original with characters written vertically

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the page layout, which is used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 101

08-655
Reset 05/08 Codes
Purpose
This code is used to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) to their default values.

Description
When this code is used, the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) are reset to their default values.

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) to their default values, after replacing the SRAM board.

Caution
If this code is performed, every set value, which has been adjusted individually at the request of a user, is reset to its default value. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Print the current value for each code in list print mode, and then perform this code. Check the printed list and enter the set value for each code, in order to restore the set values to the state before this code is performed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 102

08-660/661
Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Fax Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
An incoming fax or e-mail image can be forwarded to a client PC by e-mail, transmitted by the Internet FAX, or saved in the shared folder or e-Filing of the equipment, according to the forwarding option entered in [Administration] on the TopAccess. These codes are used to specify whether or not to use the auto-forwarding function. A destination e-mail address to forward the image does not need to be entered in the address book in advance. Instead, a user can select whether to enter the e-mail address directly, or use the address book or the group, in order to set on the TopAccess. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-660 08-661 Applied to Auto-forwarding setting of received fax Auto-forwarding setting of received e-mail

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail is reset. 0: Does not forward 1: Automatically forwards * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail.

Caution
If forwarding by e-mail or Internet FAX is selected, incoming images are forcibly printed out. A forwarding destination e-mail address does not need to be entered in the address book in advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 103

08-666
BOX Partition Clearing
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
An area specifically for storing TWAIN image data captured when the scanner function is used is allocated to the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit. In the event this partition is corrupted for some reason, or in order to forcibly clear the partition, use this code to clear and initialize the partition.

Description
When this code is used, the partition of the area storing TWAIN image data is cleared.

Setting Timing
Use this code, in the event the BOX partition is corrupted for some reason. Use this code, in order to clear the BOX partition for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the BOX partition, all TWAIN image data, which has been stored, is cleared.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 104

08-669
System All Clearing
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the adjustment values and set values, which are stored in the SRAM on the Network Printer Kit control board. Important: Never perform this code. If this code is performed, the value set for the SRAM returns to its default at the start of factory assembly (factory pre-adjustment).

Description
Never perform this code.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 105

08-672
Initialization of Department Management Information
Purpose
This code is used to initialize all department management information registered. * * On the e-STUDIO163, information registered when the access code function is used. Example of the use of this code: If the memory area storing department management information is corrupted for some accident, "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is not set. In this case, use this code to initialize the area. Department management information is normally initialized at factory shipping.

Description
When the [START] button is pressed after the value is set, all department management information is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code, if "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is not set. (In the event the area storing the department management information is corrupted.) Use this code, in order to destroy and initialize all department management information.

Caution
If this code is performed, all department management information registered is cleared. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Do not use this code just to reset the counter for all departments. Instead, reset the counter on the control panel according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [DEPARTMENT CODE] --> key in 1 (department number for master code) --> [COUNT CLEAR]

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 106

08-684/686
Rebuilding Databases
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit and Scanner Upgrade Kit are installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to rebuild the databases in the equipment. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-684 08-686 Applied to Rebuilding all databases related to the address book Rebuilding all databases related to the telephone book

Description
When these codes are used, the databases are rebuilt.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reconfigure or rebuild the databases.

Caution
If these codes are performed, all information in the address book or telephone book is initialized (or cleared). Therefore, carefully perform the setting.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 107

08-685
Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
The equipment can print two sheets of paper by alternately circulating them internally, while continuously feeding the next sheet without waiting for the one where a copy of one side is made to exit in duplexing mode. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation is reset. 0: Disables 1: Enables * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation in duplexing mode.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 108

08-690
CF Formatting
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to format the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.

Description
When this code is used, the area storing TWAIN image data, address book data and templates is formatted and the CF returns to its initial state.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 109

08-691
Template Function Setting
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
In scanner mode, when the one-touch buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated for templates and pressed, the templates set on the TopAccess are available. This code is used to specify whether or not to use this template function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the template function is reset. 0: Uses 1: Does not use * Default: 1 * On the e-STUDIO165/205, the template function is set according to the following operation: [USER FUNCTIONS] --> [INITIAL SETUP] --> [TEMPLATE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the template function.

Caution
If the template function is used, no address can be entered in the telephone book when the one-touch buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 110

08-693
Initialization of NIC Information
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to reset the NIC (Network Interface Card included in the Network Printer Kit control board) to the initial state.

Description
When this code is used, the NIC is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code, in the event a NIC malfunction occurs for some reason.

Caution
If this code is performed, all NIC information is initialized. Therefore, it is necessary to reconfigure it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 111

08-695
Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports Embedded IC chip)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge is properly installed, and whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge properly installed is a recommended one.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to check the remaining amount of toner is reset. 0: Does not check 1: Checks * Default: CND: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code, in order to use a toner cartridge other than the recommended ones.

Caution
If the set value is reset, the set value for Toner near empty threshold value (08-971) is also reset as follows automatically: If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned OFF. If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 112

08-698
Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit
Purpose
This code is used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up. If the number of paper continuously exits exceeds the limit number, the equipment suspends operations, lights up or flashes the lamp on the control panel, and displays a message.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset. 0: Does not limit the number of paper exits 1: Limits the number of paper exits * Default: 1 * The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 113

08-699
Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit
Purpose
The equipment has the function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up. This code is used to set the number of paper continuously exits per job.

Description
When this code is used, the number of paper continuously exits per job, is specified. Set value = Limited number of paper * * * Acceptable values: 1 to 999 Default: 250 (sheets of paper)

Whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is specified for Limit function for the number of paper exit (08-698).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the limit number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 114

08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/ 796


TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The "TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS)" is a system, which enables remote administration of device information of the equipment via the Internet. These codes are required to enable communications between the "Device Management Portal (DMP)", which is installed over the Internet, and the equipment. The equipment transmits information of each counter type, service call error information, usage condition of supplies, etc. to the DMP. A service administrator can remote control such information by accessing to the DMP.

Description
1) RDMS setting
Code 08-702 Description RDMS Function Setting If "invalid" is set, device information is not transmitted to the DMP (RDMS does not function). Set value In order to enable this setting, "valid (DMP)" is set at the equipment. 0: Valid (DMP), 1: Valid (DMC), 2: Invalid * Default: 2

2) Proxy setting (A network environment with the proxy)


Code 08-726 Description HTTP Proxy Setting This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the proxy setting. HTTP Proxy IP Address Setting This code is used to enter the IP address obtained from the user. Be sure to enter in "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" format. e.g. 192.168.010.001 HTTP Proxy Port Number Setting This code is used to enter the port number obtained from the user. HTTP Proxy ID Setting This code is used to enter the ID obtained from the user. HTTP Proxy Password Setting This code is used to enter the password obtained from the user. Set value 0: Valid, 1: invalid * Default: 1 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000

08-727

08-728

Acceptable values: 0 to 65535 * Default: 0 Maximum 30 letters

08-729

08-730

Maximum 30 letters

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 115

3) RDMS Initial Registration Perform the settings for initial registration in order to communicate with the DMP.
Code 08-718 Description Remote-controlled Service Initial Registration This code is used to complete all settings regarding the RDMS and set "start" during initial registration. Check the status of remote-controlled service initial registration. Remote-controlled Service initially-registered URL Only the URL is checked because the URL shown on the right has been entered as the default. Note: Note: Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Dealer's Name DMP Login Name This code is used to enter the login name obtained from the DMP Management. Tentative Password This code is used to enter the tentative password obtained from the DMP Management. Set value 0: OFF, 1: Start, 2: Only certification is scanned * Default: 0 0: Not registered, 1: Registered * Default: 0 Maximum 256 letters * Default: https//device.mfp.support.com: 443/device/community.ashx

08-720 08-707

08-772 08-773

Maximum 100 letters Maximum 20 letters

08-719

Maximum 10 letters

4) Periodical communication setting Set the access timing, etc. to the DMP.
Code 08-703 Description Remote-controlled Service HTTP Server URL Setting This code is used to enter the URL of the DMP obtained from the DMP Management. Recovery Mode Time Setting of Emergency Short Interval Communication Mode Recovery time interval from the emergency to normal mode Interval Setting of Emergency Short Interval Communication Mode Polling Timing Setting This code is used to set the polling timing. Remote-controlled Service Self-diagnosis Code Writing Response Waiting Time (Timeout) Setting This code is used to set the disconnection time of communication when there is no response from the DMP. Specified Polling Day Selection Day-1 of Month This code is used to set the month and day of the polling day. Specified Polling Day Selection Day-2 of Month This code is used to set the month and day of the polling day. Specified Polling Day Selection Day-3 of Month This code is used to set the month and day of the polling day. Set value Maximum 256 letters

08-710

Acceptable values: 1 to 48 (hours) * Default: 24 (hours)

08-711 08-715

08-716 08-717

Acceptable values: 30 to 360 (minutes) * Default: 60 (minutes) 00:00 to 23:59 e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30. * Default: 1230 0: Prohibited, 1: Accepted * Default: 0 Acceptable values: 1 to 30 (minutes) * Default: 3 (minutes)

08-780

08-781

08-782

0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month * Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 116

Code 08-783

08-784 08-785

Description Specified Polling Day Selection Day-4 of Month This code is used to set the month and day of the polling day. Specified Polling Day of the Week (Sunday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday)

08-786 08-787 08-788 08-789 08-790 08-796

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Tuesday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Wednesday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Thursday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Friday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Saturday) Specified End of Month Polling This code is used to specify whether or not to poll at the end of the month.

Set value 0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday) * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * 0: OFF, 1: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0 0: OFF, 1: ON * Default: 0

5) Service center call function setting Set the notification method and destination when a service center call error occurs.
Code 08-721 Description Service Center Call Set value 0: Valid, 1: Notifies all, 2: Notifies other than a jam * Default: 2 Maximum 256 letters * Never change the initial setting without instructions.

08-723

Service Center Call HTTP Server URL Setting When a service call error occurs, this code is used to transmit the error content to the specified HTTP server.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to remote control information of the equipment using the RDMS.

Caution
Obtain the following information and then use these codes: Information to be obtained from the DMP Management. - URL of the DMP - HTTP port number of the DMP - URL for DMP initial registration - HTTP port number for DMP initial registration - Login name of the DMP - Login name of the DMP - Tentative password for DMP Information to be obtained from the user. - IP address of the HTTP proxy server - Port number of the HTTP proxy server - D of the HTTP proxy server - Password for the HTTP proxy server Check the date and time, make corrections if necessary, and then use these codes.
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 117

08-712/713/714
250 sheets limitation for output pages
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the printer function or Fax reception function is used to print, these codes are used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-712 08-713 08-714 Applied to Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the GDI printer function is used Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the network printer function is used Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the Fax function is used

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset. 0: Does not limit the number of paper exits 1: Limits the number of paper exits * Default: 0 * The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 118

08-767 to 771/775 to 778


Service Notification Function Setting
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This equipment installs the "Service Notification Function," which notifies a service engineer of the equipment status (each counter information, service call error information, and PM counter information) by e-mail. These codes are necessary in order to use the service notification function.

Description
Code 08-767 Description Service Notification Setting * If "Invalid" is set, the service notification function becomes invalid. Destination E-mail Address 1 This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address. * Set values for codes 08-777/778 in the same manner to designate several addresses. Total Counter Information transmission setting This code is used to specify whether or not to perform the total counter information transmission. Total Counter Transmission Interval Setting This code is used to specify whether or not to perform the total counter transmission on which day of each month. PM Counter Information Transmission Setting This code is used to specify whether or not to perform the PM counter information transmission. Error Contents of Equipment Transmission Setting This code is used to specify whether or not to transmit error contents of the equipment. Setting Total Counter Transmission Time This code is used to set the transmission time. Destination E-mail Address 2 This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address Destination E-mail Address 3 This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address. Set value 0: Invalid, 1: Valid * Default: 0 Maximum 192 letters

08-768

08-769

0: Invalid, 1: Valid * Default: 0

08-770

1 to 31 (1st to 31st day) * Default: 1 (1st day)

08-771

0: Invalid, 1: Valid * Default: 0 0: Invalid, 1: Valid * Default: 0

08-775

08-776 08-777

00:00 to 23:59 e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30. Maximum 192 letters

08-778

Maximum 192 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically notify a service engineer of the equipment status using the service notification function.

Caution
The network setting is necessary in order to send e-mail in advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 119

08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867


Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
* Code 08-818 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output value, which is adjusted for "Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)" in toner save mode and original mode. A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-805 08-806 08-814 08-807 08-808 08-809 08-826 08-864 08-819 08-865 08-866 08-867 08-818 Applied to Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save mode) Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI) Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Text) Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo) Main charger bias correction (Toner save mode) Main charger bias correction (General) Main charger bias correction (GDI) Main charger bias correction (General) Main charger bias correction (Text) Main charger bias correction (Photo) Main charger bias correction (Fax) Function mode Printer (PCL/PS)

Printer (GDI) Copy

Printer (PCL/PS) Printer (GDI) Copy

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower (or more neutral). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher printing density. The variation in the amount of the main charger grid bias voltage per bit is approximately 3V. 0 to 255 (bit value) * Default: 08-805 to 809/814: 98, 08-818/819/826/864 to 867: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output value in each mode. Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output value specifically in transparency film mode.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 120

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Image problems such as a carrier pulling, foggy image may occur, unless "Developer bias correction (08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes. For example, if the main charger grid bias is corrected to +10 bit (.-30V), the developer bias output needs to be set to +6 bit (.-30V) accordingly. Descriptions for codes 08-826/864 to 867 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and then use codes 08-805 to 809 specifically in transparency film mode. Descriptions for codes 08-814/819 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used. Descriptions for codes 08-805/806/826/864 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used. Descriptions for code 08-865 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 121

08-830/868/869
Transfer DC Correction
Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the transfer DC output value, which is adjusted in "Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)" at the leading edge, center and trailing edge of paper. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-830 08-868 08-869 Applied to Transfer DC output correction (C), center of paper Transfer DC output correction (H), leading edge of paper Transfer DC output correction (L), trailing edge of paper

Description
When these codes are used, the transfer DC output is corrected. As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower. 0 to 255 (bit value) * Default value: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the condition of the transferred image at the leading edge, center and trailing edge is poor due to the paper used or the operating environment.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 122

08-831/870/871
Separation DC Output Correction
Purpose
These codes are used to correct the separation status, while correcting the separation transformer DC output adjusted in "Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)" at the leading edge, center and trailing edge of paper. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-831 08-870 08-871 Applied to Separation DC output correction (C), center of paper Separation DC output correction (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of paper Separation DC output correction (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading edge of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage becomes higher, and the positive electric charge on paper becomes lower. Then separation becomes easy. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the DC voltage becomes lower, and the ratio of positive electric charge on paper to become lower is decreased. Then separation becomes difficult. * * Default value: 128 Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: difficult to separate, 255: easy to separate)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the separation condition is poor, depending on paper being used and environment.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Note that when the separation DC output is increased too much, poor transfer (avatar) may occur. Decrease the separation DC output, if poor transfer (avatar) occurs. Note that when the separation DC output is decreased too much, paper separation efficiency may be decreased.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 123

08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863


Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
* Code 08-857 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value, which is adjusted in "Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)" in toner save mode and original mode. A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-833 08-834 08-840 08-835 08-836 08-837 08-859 08-860 08-858 08-861 08-862 08-863 08-857 Applied to Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save mode) Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI) Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Text) Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo) Developer bias correction (Toner save mode) Developer bias correction (General) Developer bias correction (GDI) Developer bias correction (General) Developer bias correction (Text) Developer bias correction (Photo) Developer bias correction (Fax) Function mode Printer (PCL/PS)

Printer (GDI) Copy

Printer (PCL/PS) Printer (GDI) Copy

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (magnetic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher printing density. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density. The variation in the amount of the developer bias voltage per bit is approximately 5V. 0 to 255 (bit value) * Default: 08-833 to 837/840: 107, 08-857 to 863: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value in each mode. Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value specifically in transparency film mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 124

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Image problems such as a carrier adhesion, foggy image may occur, unless "Main charger grid bias correction (08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes. For example, if the developer bias output is set to +6 bit (.-30V), the main charger grid bias needs to be corrected to +10 bit (.-30V) accordingly. Descriptions for codes 08-859 to 863 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and then use codes 08-833 to 837 specifically in transparency film mode. Descriptions for codes 08-840/858 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used. Descriptions for codes 08-833/834/859/860 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used. Descriptions for code 08-861 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 125

08-838
Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching
Purpose
The toner recycling mechanism is installed in the equipment. If the process unit (cleaner and developer unit) becomes hot and toner remains in the transportation path for recycled toner, toner also becomes hot and its performance may degrade. If the drum thermistor detects the hot process unit (40C or more), another 20 seconds are added to the period for toner transportation, in order to completely transport toner remaining in the transportation path into the developer unit, at the end of printing. Then, the cooling fan rotates for 120 seconds, in order to cool down the transportation path for recycled toner.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the recycled toner saving control is reset. 0: Enable (Control is enabled.) 1: Disable (Control is disabled.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to "Disable" the toner saving control, because it is frequently operated.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. When "Disable" is set, the internal equipment becomes hot due to continuous printing, and toner degrades in the transportation path for recycled toner by a high temperature. Problems such as a locked transportation area for recycled toner or foggy image may occur.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 126

08-839
Correction by Temperature/Humidity
Purpose
The temperature and humidity sensor detects the temperature and humidity of outside air captured in the equipment, in order to prevent print quality from being affected by the temperature and humidity in a location where the equipment is installed. The auto-toner sensor output, transfer DC output, main charger bias, separation DC output, developer bias and laser output are corrected based on the result. This code is used to specify whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on these outputs.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on the auto-toner sensor output, each bias output and laser output is reset. 0: All valid (Collects all) 1: All invalid (Does not collect) 2: Corrects only the auto-toner sensor output 3: All valid except transfer and separation * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset temperature and humidity correction items.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 127

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884
Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
* Code 08-884 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power adjusted in "Laser power adjustment (05-286)" in toner save mode or original mode. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-872 08-875 08-883 08-873 08-876 08-877 08-884 Applied to Laser output correction (General) Laser output correction (Toner save mode) Laser output correction (GDI) Laser output correction (General) Laser output correction (Text) Laser output correction (Photo) Laser output correction (Fax) Function mode Printer (PCL/PS) Printer (GDI) Copy

Fax

Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower. 0 to 255 (bit value) * Default: 08-872/873/875/876/877: 128, 08-883: 136, 08-884: 110

Setting Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power in toner save mode and original mode.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Descriptions for code 08-883 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used. Descriptions for codes 08-872/875 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used. Descriptions for code 08-873 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 128

08-886
Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time)
Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop in the ready state. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set. When this code is used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) in the ready state is reset 0: No temperature drop control 1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19 20: Temperature and timing selected optionally * Default: 4 * * Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 1 Patterns 2, 3, 5 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing
Set 1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in the ready state. Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid: Temperature drop setting in ready state (08-404/405) Temperature drop switching time setting in ready state (08-424/425)

Caution
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully perform the setting. Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 129

08-900/906
ROM Version Display
* Code 08-906 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The electric circuits in the equipment are composed of multiple PC boards, whose roles and operations are different. The CPU and FROM (flash ROM) are mounted on the MAIN board, which plays a critical role. The CPU performs processing, based on the programs written in the ROM. This allows each unit or section in the equipment to be operated. The CPU drive programs on the PFC board are written in the FROM embedded in the CPU, which is mounted on the PFC board, in the same manner. These codes are used to display and check the versions of the programs, which are stored in the flash ROM on each board. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-900 08-906 Applied to System firmware ROM version display (FROM on the MAIN board) PFC ROM version display (FROM embedded in the CPU on the PFC board)

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each flash ROM are shown as follows: (X: Major version, Y: Minor version) 08-900: System ROM version (system firmware version): e-STUDIO163/203: XX-YYY e-STUDIO165/205: JPN: T208SY0UXXX CND: T208SY0CXXX Others: T208SY0WXXX 08-906: PFC ROM version: XXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the ROM on each board, after updating the firmware, such as the system firmware and engine firmware.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 130

08-905
Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at Duplex Copying
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to simplex copy the one-sided last page or duplex copy the onesided last page where a blank page is added to the back of the one-sided last page to handle as an even page original, when an odd page original is duplex copied.

Description
When this code is used, the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying is specified. 0: Simplex copying 1: Duplex copying (Blank page is added) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 131

08-921/1951
FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display
* * Code 08-1951 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. Code 08-1951 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the MAIN board, contains equipment program data. The FROM, which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains network-related control (print) programs. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these programs, which are stored in each memory. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-921 08-1951 Applied to Equipment program data version display CPU version display on the Network Printer Kit control board

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each memory are shown as follows: 08-921: Equipment program data version: VTHXX.YYY Z * X: Major version, Y: Minor version Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W) 08-1951: CPU version on the Network Printer Kit control board: X.YY/12 * X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the system firmware.

Caution
The following program data are stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to check the versions in 08 SETTING code. System ROM (system firmware): 08-900 Equipment program data: 08-921 Function table data: 08-922 Language data: 08-923

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 132

08-922/923
Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display
* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the SYS board, contains function table data and language data. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-922 08-923 Applied to Function table data version display Language data version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of function table data and language data stored in the flash ROM are shown as follows: (X: Version, Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W)) 08-922: Function table data version: T282SY1ZXXX 08-923: Language data version: T282SY2ZXXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board, after updating the system firmware.

Caution
The following program data is stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to check the versions in 08 SETTING code. System ROM (system firmware): 08-900 Equipment program data: 08-921 Function table data: 08-922 Language data: 08-923

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 133

08-945
Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The port number 9100 is used to perform Raw TCP printing, when the equipment is used as a network printer. (The port number can be selected for "Raw port number setting (08-1074).") This code is used to specify whether to enable bi-directional communication or one-way (default) communication from a client PC to the equipment, during data transmission through the port number 9100. * Raw TCP/IP printing is available on a client's PC where Windows 2000 or Windows XP (IP-P2P V3.12 tools, provided by CD for Windows 95/98/Me) is installed. The equipment does not correspond to the bi-directional communication. However, this printing is available, if the network administrator permits the Raw TCP connection and validates the Raw TCP printing function at the print service setting. In this case, this code is used to reset the data transmission conditions (bi-directional communication ON/OFF).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable bi-directional communication through the port number 9100 is reset. 1: ON 2: OFF * Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to perform bi-directional communication through the port number 9100, when performing Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 134

08-947
Initialization when Software is Upgraded
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to perform the necessary initialization of the internal process when software is upgraded for the addition of functions and quality improvement.

Description
When the code is used, the initialization is performed for additional new functions, when software is upgraded.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the software of the equipment is upgraded.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 135

08-949
Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting
Purpose
If poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used, drum cleaning may be improper carried out due to the paper dust. The equipment pauses printing and rotate the drum in the opposite direction to print large quantities, in order to prevent drum cleaning from being improperly performed. This code is used to specify conditions to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

Description
When this code is used, the copy count is reset to rotate the drum in the opposite direction. Set value x 10 pages = Copy count to rotate the drum in the opposite direction 0: Does not rotate the drum in the opposite direction 1 to 1000: Pauses printing and rotates the drum in the opposite direction after printing the specified number of pages (100 to 10,000 pages) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if drum cleaning is improperly carried out due to paper dust. (When cleaning is improperly carried out, clean the cleaning blade and use this code prior to resuming printing.)

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 136

08-970
Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time, and switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code used, whether or not to generate the beep tone is reset, when the equipment switches to energy saver mode. 0: OFF (No beep tone is generated.) 1: ON (The beep tone is generated.) * Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 137

08-971
Toner Near Empty Threshold Value
Purpose
This code is used to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition when the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is used. The function to detect the remaining amount of toner is available only when the recommended toner cartridge is installed.

Description
When this code used, the timing to detect the toner near end condition is reset. 0: Near empty threshold value (Longer) * The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes longer. 1: Near empty threshold value (Center) 2: Near empty threshold value (Shorter) * The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes shorter. 3: No detection of the toner near end condition * Default: CND: 3, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. If 2 is set, the interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes shorter. Therefore, No Toner is more likely to be detected before the toner near end condition is detected, due to the variation or difference in the toner remaining in the toner cartridge. If the set value for Toner remaining check function (supports embedded IC chip) (08-695) is reset, the set value for code 08-971 is also reset as follows automatically: - If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned OFF. - If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 138

08-973
PCL Line Feed Code Setting
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL), when the Network Printer Kit is used to print.

Description
When this code is used, the feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL) is reset. 0: Auto (Automatically determined) 1: CR = CR, LF = LF 2: CR = CR + LF, LF = LF 3: CR = CR, LF = CR + LF * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL).

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 139

08-995
Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display
* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, a serial number is entered up to 20 digits. * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Caution
Only the numeric values from 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters from A to Z are acceptable.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 140

08-1002
Selection of NIC Board Status Information
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to print out the NIC status, when the hardware is reset. * At power-on, or when any setting where the initialization of the NIC is required on the control panel or TopAccess, the hardware is reset.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to print out the NIC status is specified, when the hardware is reset. 1: Does not print, when the hardware is reset. 2: Prints, when the hardware is reset. * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to print out the NIC status.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 141

08-1003
Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the Ethernet speed and communication speed, depending on the network environment where the equipment is connected.

Description
When this code is used, the Ethernet speed and communication speed are specified. 1: Auto 2: 10 Mbps Half Duplex 3: 10 Mbps Full Duplex 4: 100 Mbps Half Duplex 5: 100 Mbps Full Duplex * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Change the set value from the default, if a network connection cannot be established properly by default (Auto), due to compatibility with a hub.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 142

08-1006 to 1010/1112
TCP/IP
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via TCP/IP. TCP/IP needs to be set, in order to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Description
Code 08-1006 Description Method of IP Addressing Set value 1: Manual (fixed), 2: Auto (DHCP) 3: Does not handle Auto IP at auto (DHCP) * Default: 2 Maximum 96 letters 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1007 08-1008

08-1009

Domain Name IP Address If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 081006, this code is used to enter the IP address of the equipment. Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value. (The set value will be bypassed.) Subnet Mask If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 081006, this code is used to enter a subnet mask, when necessary. Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never change the set value. (The set value will be bypassed.)

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter a subnet mask in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 255.255.255.000 Note: Note: Never set "000.000.000.000" or "255.255.255.255" for a subnet mask. Otherwise, the SMB function will not be available, even if the SMB protocol is enabled. 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter a gateway address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1010

08-1112

Gateway If the equipment is used via the router over the network, this code is used to enter a default gateway address. Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never change the set value.(The set value will be bypassed.) Host Name

Maximum 63 letters * Default: MFP_serial

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 143

08-1011/1012
IPX/SPX
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via IPX/SPX. IPX/SPX needs to be set, in order to use the Novell printing functions via IPX/SPX, when the Net-Ware server is used.

Description
Code 08-1011 Description Availability of IPX This code is used to specify whether or not to enable IPX/SPX. Network Frame Type This code is used to select a network frame type, when necessary. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 1: Auto, 2: IEEE 802.3, 3: Ethernet II, 4: IEEE 802.3 SNMP, 5: IEEE 802.2 * Default: 1

08-1012

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the Novell printing function via IPX/SPX, when the NetWare server is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 144

08-1013
Availability of NCP Burst
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the burst transfer of print data in Novell NCP printing.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the burst transfer is specified. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to improve print performance in the version of Novell NetWare 4.12 or later.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 145

08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105
AppleTalk
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via AppleTalk. AppleTalk needs to be set, in order to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

Description
Code 08-1014 Description Availability of AppleTalk This code is used to specify whether or not to enable AppleTalk. Zone Setting of AppleTalk This code is used to enter a name of a zone where the equipment is connected to, when necessary. If no zone name is entered, the equipment is connected to the default zone "*." Validity/Invalidity of Rendezvous When Rendezvous is selected in the OSX with Web Browser "Safari," the equipment over the network is automatically detected. (The Service Name explained in code "081105" is used for automatic detection.) Access to the TopAccess is available by only clicking the equipment name, which is detected. If a number of equipments are connected over the network, a number such as "2", "3", is added to the end of the service name of the 2nd equipment or later on Safari. Link-Local Host Name This code is used to enter the equipment name. Service Name This code is used to enter the service name of the equipment for the Rendezvous function. This service name is used when the Rendezvous function is used to search for the equipment over the network. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 Maximum 32 letters * "* (wild card)" as a default value

08-1015

08-1103

1: Valid, 2: Invalid Default: 1

08-1104

Maximum 127 letters Default: MFP_serial Maximum 63 letters Default: * e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO163 e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO203 e-STUDIO165: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO165 e-STUDIO205: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO205

08-1105

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 146

08-1017 to 1019
DNS
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to set a FQDN name to each server address, when DNS is used. The availability of DNS and the DNS server address need to be set, in order to include the FQDN in the address of the SMTP server (08-1038) or POP3 server (08-1047).

Description
Code 08-1017 Description Availability of DNS This code is used to specify whether or not to enable DNS. IP Address to the primary DNS Server Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.100 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1018

08-1019

IP Address to the secondary DNS Server

Setting Timing
These codes are used to set a host name for the equipment, when DNS is used.

Caution
To search for the above host name on the DNS server where DNS is set, the target host name needs to be registered on this DNS server. For further information regarding the settings on the DNS server, contact a network administrator, who is responsible for establishing the network environment with the equipment. A host name is the name expressed after @ and before the following dot "." in the FQDN (e-mail address) (e.g. user@host.domain).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 147

08-1020
DDNS Desired Level
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to enable the dynamic DNS service, if the dynamic DNS is supported on the DNS server.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS service is specified. 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi Secure DDNS * Default: 3

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the dynamic DNS service.

Caution
DDNS of the equipment supports only two options, "Via DHCP" and "Insecure DDNS." "Via DHCP" is a function, which uses the DNS registration function (registration function of record A) on the DHCP server. "Insecure DDNS" is intended to register DNS directly on the DNS server. Even if other options ("Secure DDNS" and "Multi Secure DDNS") are selected, they will not function.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 148

08-1024/1025
Name of WINS Server
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify an IP address of the WINS server, when the WINS server is used to share a file or printer between different subnets.

Description
Code 08-1024 Description Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Primary) This code is used to enter an IP address of the primary WINS server, if the WINS server it is used to provide a NetBios name and workgroup name of the equipment. Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value. 000.000.000.000" is set by default. If Auto (DHCP) is selected, the address is acquired on the DHCP server. However, if some sort of IP Address is registered, the address cannot be acquired on the DHCP server even if Auto (DHCP) is selected. Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Secondary) This code is used to enter an IP address of the secondary WINS server, if the WINS server is used to provide a NetBios name and workgroup name of the equipment. Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value. 000.000.000.000" is set by default. If Auto (DHCP) is selected, the address is acquired on the DHCP server. However, if some sort of IP Address is registered, the address cannot be acquired on the DHCP server even if Auto (DHCP) is selected. Set value Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010 Note: Note: Never enter an IP address starting with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244" (e.g. 244.10.10.10). Numeric values are acceptable, but not characters.

08-1025

Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010 Note: Note: Never enter an IP address starting with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244" (e.g. 244.10.10.10). Numeric values are acceptable, but not characters.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to share a file or printer between different subnets when the WINS server is used to share a file or printer between different subnets.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 149

08-1026 to 1029
NetWare
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to establish the Novell printing environment.

Description
Code 08-1026 Description Availability of Bindery This code is used to specify whether or not to enable Novell printing in NetWare Bindery mode. Availability of NDS This code is used to specify whether or not to enable Novell printing in NetWare NDS mode. * If "1" (available) is set, perform the settings for codes 08-1028 and 1029. Directory Service Context This code is used to enter the NDS context of the NetWare print server for the equipment. Directory Service Tree This code is used to enter the NDS tree. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1027

1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1028

Maximum 127 letters

08-1029

Maximum 47 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to establish the Novell printing environment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 150

08-1030 to 1032
HTTP
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility, or to enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Description
Code 08-1030 Description Availability of HTTP Server This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the HTTP server. Port Number to NIC HTTP Server This code is used to enter a port number for HTTP access. Normally, "80" is set. Note: Note: Use the default value, unless otherwise required. Port Number to System HTTP Server This code is used to enter a port number for accessing the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility. Normally, "8080" is set. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 80

08-1031

08-1032

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 8080

Setting Timing
Use these codes to: Use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility. Enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Caution
If the port number to NIC HTTP server is changed from the default "80," the TopAccess is not available on the Web browser. Therefore, use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 151

08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111


SMTP
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

Description
Code 08-1037 Description Availability of SMTP Client "1" (available) is set to transmit a fax through the Internet from the equipment via the SMTP server. FQDN or IP Address to SMTP Server This code is used to enter an IP address of the SMTP server. Or enter the FQDN. TCP Port Number of SMTP Client This code is used to enter a port number for accessing the SMTP server. Normally, "25" is set. Availability of SMTP Server This code is used to specify whether or not to use the equipment as the SMTP server. "1" (available) is set to use the offramp gateway function. TCP Port Number of SMTP Server This code is used to enter a port number to receive a fax or e-mail through the Internet via the SMTP server. Normally, "25" is set. E-mail Box Name to SMTP Server This code is used to enter an e-mail address assigned to the equipment. Availability of Offramp This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the offramp gateway transmission. Offramp Security This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the offramp gateway security. If "1" (available) is set, the offramp gateway transmission is applied only to the fax number registered in the address book of the equipment. Printing at Offramp This code is used to specify whether or not to print a document forwarded, when the offramp gateway function is used. SMTP authentication system Description 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1038

Maximum 128 letters

08-1039

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 25

08-1040

1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1041

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 25

08-1042

Maximum 192 letters

08-1043

1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 2 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1044

08-1045

1: Prints, 2. Does not print * Default: 1

08-1100

08-1101

Login Name for SMTP Authentication This code is used to enter the login name for the equipment to access to the STMP server.

1: Plain, 2: Login, 3: Digest MD5, 4: Disable * Default: 4 Maximum 64 letters

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 152

Code 08-1102

08-1111

Description Login Password for SMTP Authentication This code is used to enter the password for the equipment to access to the SMTP server. Validity/Invalidity of POP before SMTP This code is used to select whether or not to transmit e-mail after the authentication by POP is performed. If "valid" is selected, unauthorized e-mail transmission and disrupt can be prevented.

Description Maximum 64 letters

1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 4

Setting Timing
Use these codes to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

3
Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 153

08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098
POP3
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to receive a fax through the Internet or an e-mail print job, when POP3 is used.

Description
Code 08-1046 Description Availability of POP3 Clients This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the POP3 client function. "1" (available) is set to retrieve a fax through the Internet on the POP3 server. FQDN or IP Address to POP3 Server This code is used to enter an IP address of the POP3 server. Or enter the FQDN. Types of POP3 server This code is used to select a type of login to the POP3 server. Login Name to POP3 Server This code is used to enter a login name, allowing the equipment to access the POP3 server. Login Password to POP3 Server This code is used to enter a password, allowing the equipment to access the POP3 server. E-mail Reception Interval This code is used to specify an interval until the equipment accesses the POP3 to check presence of incoming messages. TCP Port Number of POP3 Server This code is used to enter a port number for accessing the POP3 server. Normally, "110" is set. Number of Text Print Pages Control of Email Reception This code is used to set the maximum number of pages of e-mail text to print. MDN Reply at E-mail Reception This code is used to select whether or not to automatically return a message, when email is received. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1047

Maximum 128 letters

08-1048

1: Auto, 2: POP, 3: APOP * Default: 1 Maximum 96 letters

08-1049

08-1050

Maximum 96 letters

08-1051

Acceptable values: 0 to 4096 (0 to 4096 minutes) * Default: 5 (minutes) Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 110

08-1052

08-1097

Acceptable values: 1 to 99 (1 to 99 pages) * Default: 5 (pages)

08-1098

1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use these codes to receive a fax or an e-mail print job through the Internet, when POP3 is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 154

08-1055
FTP
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Description
When this code is used, a port number for accessing the FTP client is entered. * * Default: 21 Acceptable values: 1 to 65535

Setting Timing
Use this code to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 155

08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099
SNMP
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is used.

Description
Code 08-1063 Description MIB Function This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the MIB function. "1" (available) is set to permit a user to use the TopAccess, DocMon, TWAIN driver, File Downloader and Address Book Viewer. Setting of Read Community This code is used to enter a trap community name for the SNMP trap. Setting of Read/Write Community This code is used to enter a private community name, which permits reading and writing through SNMP communication. TRAP Destination IP address This code is used to enter an IP address where the SNMP trap is sent. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1065

Maximum 31 letters * Default: public Maximum 31 letters * Default: private

08-1066

08-1069

08-1070

08-1099

Community Setting of TRAP This code is used to enter a trap community name for the IP trap. IPX TRAP Destination

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000 Enter an IP address in the following format: "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" e.g. 192.168.001.010 Maximum 31 letters * Default: public Maximum 24 letters Letters from 0 to F are valid (0 to 9, A to F). The address is expressed as "n.n.n.n:m-m-mm-m-m:oo" and each letter is 1 byte (2 letters). It is not required to separate each letters by "." (dot), ":" (colon), and "-" (hyphen). Each "n" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates the IPX Network Address. Each "m" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates the MacAddress. "oo" is 2-byte data in binary, and indicates the socket number. e.g. 000000010040af7db4b80001 Enter 12 bytes (24 letters), from 0 to F as shown above.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is used.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 156

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 157

08-1073/1074
Raw TCP Print
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform Raw TCP printing.

Description
Code 08-1073 Description Availability of Raw TCP This code is used to specify whether or not to enable Raw TCP printing. TCP Port Number of Raw This code is used to enter a port number for Raw TCP printing. Normally, "9100" is set. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 9100

08-1074

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 158

08-1075 to 1077
LPD Print
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Description

3
Code 08-1075 Description Availability of LPD Client This code is used to specify whether or not to enable LPD printing. TCP Port Number of LPD This code is used to enter a port number for LPD printing. Normally, "515" is set. LPD Queue Name This code is used to enter an LPD queue name. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 515

08-1076

08-1077

Maximum 31 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 159

08-1078 to 1088
IPP Print
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Description
Code 08-1078 Description Availability of IPP This code is used to specify whether or not to enable IPP printing. Availability of IPP Port Number "80" This code is used to specify whether or not to enable port 80 in IPP printing. Normally, port 631 is used for IPP access. In this case, a user needs to specify the IPP port number for an URL. Once "1" (available) is set, IPP access via port 80, which is a standard port for HTTP access, is permitted. Therefore, an IPP port number does not need to be specified for an URL any more. TCP Port Number of IPP This code is used to enter a port number for IPP printing. Normally, "631" is set. IPP Printer Name This code is used to enter a name of the IPP printer. IPP Printer Location This code is used to enter a location to install the equipment. IPP Printer Information This code is used to enter any information regarding the equipment. IPP Printer Information (More) This code is used to enter the URL of the website, where further information regarding the equipment is introduced. Installer of IPP Printer Driver IPP is capable of automatically installing the printer driver, when a URL of a location where the printer driver installer is retrieved is entered. But the equipment does not support this function. IPP Printer "Make and Model" This code is used to enter a manufacturer name of the equipment. IPP Printer Information (More) MFGR This code is used to enter a URL of the website, where further information regarding a manufacturer of the equipment is introduced. Set value 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1 1: Available, 2: Not available * Default: 1

08-1079

08-1080

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535 * Default: 631

08-1081

Maximum 127 letters

08-1082

08-1083

Maximum 127 letters e.g. If the equipment is installed Room 123 on the second floor in Building A, enter "A2F-Room No. 123." Maximum 127 letters

08-1084

Maximum 127 letters * Default: http://www.e-studioseries.com/ Maximum 127 letters

08-1085

08-1086

Maximum 127 letters * Default: TOSHIBA Corporation Maximum 127 letters * Default: http://www.e-studioseries.com/

08-1087

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 160

Code 08-1088

Description IPP Message from Operator This code is used to enter messages that an operator or system administrator generates in order to indicate the printer information or status.

Set value Maximum 127 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 161

08-1093 to 1096
NetWare Print
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Description
Code 08-1093 Description Login Name to Novell Print Server This code is used to enter a print server name created on the NetWare file server. Login Password to Novell Print Server This code is used to enter a login password specified on the print server, when necessary. Name of Search Root Server This code is used to enter a name of the NetWare file server. Scan Rate Setting of Print Queue Set value Maximum 47 letters

08-1094

Maximum 31 letters

08-1095

Maximum 31 letters

08-1096

Acceptable values: 1 to 255 (1 to 255 seconds) * Default: 5 (seconds)

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 162

08-1114
Text Transmission of Internet FAX
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to permit the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet from the equipment. There are two types of text transmitted, information, which equipment provides such as dates and page numbers, and text, which a user enters on the control panel.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the transmission of text is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet. 0: Invalid (Does not transmit text) 1: Valid (Transmits text) * 1: Valid (Transmits text)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

Caution
If Invalid is set, information such as dates and page numbers, which the equipment provides automatically, is not transmitted. Even if "0" (Invalid) is set, a user can enter text on the control panel. However, this text is not transmitted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 163

08-1123
NT Domain ON/OFF Setting
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
To participate in a Windows NT network domain or the Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory, the NT domain needs to be enabled. However, only the workgroup is supported for the time being.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the NT domain is reset. Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to participate in the workgroup. 3: NT domain ON (Domain selected) * Workgroup enabled (The domain setting is disabled for the time being.) 4: NT domain OFF (Workgroup selected) * Workgroup enabled * Default: 4

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to participate in a Windows NT network domain or Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 164

08-1124
Workgroup Name
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

Description
This code is used to enter a name of the workgroup. Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to be a member of the specified workgroup. Set value = Name of workgroup Up to 15 characters (ASCII) * Default: workgroup

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 165

08-1141
Display of MAC Address
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, the MAC address is displayed. e.g. **:**:**:**:**:** 6-byte data is divided into colon-delimited 2-byte blocks.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the MAC address.

Caution
Make sure that the MAC address has been correctly registered, if the Network Printer Kit is replaced, and then the serial number of the equipment is entered.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 166

08-1144
Processing in the event of Memory Full Error
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the method of processing data (pages), which have been scanned, if the amount of data exceeds the memory capacity during the scan operation.

Description
When this code is used, the method of processing pages, which have been scanned, is reset, in the event of a memory full error. 0: Transfers scanned pages 1: Deletes scanned pages * Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method in order to delete data, which have been scanned, in the event of a memory full error.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 167

08-1149
Enhanced Bold for PCL6
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to make bold text much thicker, when PCL6 is used to print.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to make bold text much thicker is reset. 0: OFF 1: ON * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if bold text is not sufficiently printed in bold type.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 168

08-1372
Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) but not in sleep mode. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 0 to 99999999 (hours) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment). To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1378/1380/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 169

08-1378
Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state). To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1380/1382.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 170

08-1380
Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time during printing). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time during printing) is shown up to an 8digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time during printing). To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 171

08-1382
Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode). To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1380.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 172

08-1385/1386/1388
Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
These codes are used to count up the number of output pages by paper type at power-on of the registration sensor. If "0" is set, the counter is reset. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-1385 08-1386 08-1388 Applied to Thick paper 1 mode, copy counts Thick paper 2 mode, copy counts Transparency film mode, copy counts

Description
When these codes are used, the number of output pages by paper type is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter. 0 to 99999999 (pages) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
To display the accumulated number of output pages by paper type. To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 173

08-1410
Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter
Purpose
This code is used to display the toner cartridge driving time accumulated after a toner cartridge is supplied.

Description
When this code is used, the toner cartridge driving time is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. The display is updated as follows: * The counter value stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board is read and updated at power ON or when the front cover is closed. * The driving time is calculated and updated when a toner cartridge is driven through printing. (Data is written into the IC chip when printing is completed.) 0 to 99999999 (1 count = 1 sec.) * Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the current toner cartridge driving time.

Caution
The counter value is stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board. The counter value g0h has been written into the IC chip for a new toner cartridge; therefore, it is not necessary to use this code to reset the counter value to g0,h after replacing a toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 174

08-1428
Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing
Purpose
This code is used to clear all remaining data on the SRAM. This code is performed in order to prevent data leak when the MAIN board is disposed of.

Description
When this code is used, all remaining data on the SRAM is cleared.

Setting Timing
Use this code to dispose of the MAIN board (to replace the broken MAIN board, or to dispose of the equipment).

Caution
When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up unless the MAIN board is replaced. Therefore, never perform this code other than when disposing of the MAIN board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 175

08-1440
IP Conflict Detect
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to initialize and take over network-related settings during the update.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable initialization and takeover of network-related settings is reset. 0: Valid 1: Invalid * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to forcibly operate the network printer controller, even if an IP collision occurs when ARP is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 176

08-1447
IPP admin Name
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the name of the user who has the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 177

08-1448
IPP admin Password
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password for the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the user password for the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password for the authority to control IPP.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 178

08-1449
IPP authentication method
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to perform authentication, and also the method to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created.

Description
When this code is used, the method to perform authentication is reset when the IPP port is created. 1: Disabled 2: Basic 3: Digest 4: Basic Digest * Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to create the IPP port on the PC.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 179

08-1450
User name for IPP authentication
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

Description
When this code is used, the user name to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is created on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 180

08-1451
Password for IPP authentication
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

Description
When this code is used, the user password to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is created on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 181

08-1628
Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount
Purpose
This code is used to additionally correct the amount of reverse and forward rotation of the drum during cleaning, when a certain amount or more of paper is fed, to thoroughly clean the drum, even if poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used. If the drum is rotated too much in reverse when the drum or recovery blade is in the initial state (standby position), the recovery blade is more likely to curl up. Therefore, apply an additional correction, only if a certain amount or more of paper is fed. As the amount of reverse rotation is larger, toner is more likely to spill from the drum cleaner. The drum is rotated in reverse and forward with the same amount of rotation, and then stops. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-1628 Sub code 0 1 Applied to Drum life correction of the reverse rotation amount Drum life correction of the forward rotation amount

Description
When this code is used, the amount of additional correction for the amount of rotation of the drum during cleaning is adjusted. Set value x 10m sec. = Drum rotation time 0: Not corrected 1 to 15: Corrected (10 to 150m sec.: approx. 0.9 to 13.5 mm) * Default: 08-1628-0: 4, 08-1628-1: 9 * The correction distance is not constant due to the driving rattle or error when the motor starts up, to switch the rotation direction of the main motor.

Setting Timing
If toner spills from the drum cleaner. (Set a smaller value.) If the main motor is replaced with a different type of main motor.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. Change the amount of both reverse and forward rotation, to change this set value. If the amount of forward rotation is larger than that of reverse rotation, an unusual noise may occur. Therefore, never make the amount of forward rotation larger than that of reverse rotation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 182

08-1882
Initialization of the Scan Memory Area
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the memory area storing scanned-in data.

Description
When this code is used, the area storing scanned-in data is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code to initialize the area storing scanned-in data for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the memory area, all scanned-in data is cleared.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 183

08-1913
Function Clear LED Flashing
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to flash the reset light, if the copy function setting is different from the default after the copy operation ends. The reset light flashes until the specified function is cleared (the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to flash the reset light is reset after the copy operation ends. 0: Invalid (Always OFF) 1: Valid * Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to stop the reset light flashing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 184

08-1952 to 1955
Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version Display
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains the controller ROM, which is used for controlling the Network Printer Controller. The CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit contains the scan ROM for controlling the Scanner Upgrade Kit. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-1952 08-1953 08-1954 08-1955 Applied to Controller ROM program version display Scanner ROM program version display Controller ROM internal program version display Scanner ROM internal program version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the data stored in each memory are shown as follows: 08-1952: Program version: T282CN0XXXX * X: Version 08-1953: Program version: T282SC0XXXX * X: Version 08-1954/1955: Internal program version: VTCXX.YYYZ. * X: Major version, Y: Minor version Z: Language code (EUR: E, JPN: J, UC: U) * Descriptions for codes 08-1954 and 08-1955 are the same.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the version of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the controller ROM or scan ROM.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 185

08-1960 to 1979
IP Address Range for IP Filter
* * These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to accept only the print jobs within the IP address range specified for printing. The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code 08-1960 08-1961 08-1962 08-1963 08-1964 08-1965 08-1966 08-1967 08-1968 08-1969 08-1970 08-1971 08-1972 08-1973 08-1974 08-1975 08-1976 08-1977 08-1978 08-1979 Applied to IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 2) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 5) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 7) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9) IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 10) IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)

Description
When these codes are used, each minimum IP address and each maximum IP address of ten areas are entered. 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255 * Default: 000.000.000.000

Setting Timing
Use these codes to limit the users who can use the print function according to the IP address.

Caution
If 0.0.0.0 is entered in both ranges of the paired minimum area and maximum area, this function is disabled. This function does not affect Samba printing and Point & Print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 186

08-1989
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The Domain Name Server Option (6)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * Default: 1

Setting Timing
The condition where the domain name server option (6) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 187

08-1990
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS (Windows Internet name service) under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * Default: 1

Setting Timing
he condition where the WINS server option (44) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 188

08-1991
Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment from the DHCP server is reset. 1: Enabled (Automatically acquires) 2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire) * Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to manage the Host Name of the equipment in the DHCP server.

Caution
Currently, no unique Host Name can be set in Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003. Therefore, it is recommended to ignore this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 189

08-1993
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server is reset. 1: Enabled (Automatically acquires) 2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire) * Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 190

08-1994
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

3
Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the POP3 server option (70) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 191

08-1996
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address
* * This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205. This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the SNTP server option (42) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 192

You might also like